FenwalNET6000 Dec 2004 1 PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 210

R

FENWALNET™ 6000
Fire Alarm/Suppression
Control Unit

Installation, Operation,
and Maintenance Manual

R FM
LISTED APPROVED

UL Listing FM Approvals
File No. Project ID
S2422 3021638

P/N 06-236529-001
December 2004
R

FENWALNET™ 6000
Fire Alarm/Suppression
Control Unit

Installation, Operation, and


Maintenance Manual

P/N 06-236529-001
December 2004
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
FOREWORD
Note: This Manual, P/N 06-236529-001, is to be used by qualified and factory-trained personnel, knowledgeable
of NFPA standards and any other applicable standards in effect.
This manual is intended to clearly and accurately describe the installation, operation and maintenance of the
FENWALNET 6000 Fire Alarm/Suppression Control Unit.
Kidde-Fenwal assumes no responsibility for the application of any systems other than those addressed in this
manual. The technical data contained herein is limited strictly for informational purposes only. Kidde-Fenwal
believes this data to be accurate, but it is published and presented without any guarantee or warranty whatsoever.
Kidde-Fenwal disclaims any liability for any use that may be made of the data and information contained herein
by any and all other parties.
Any questions concerning the information presented in this manual should be addressed to:
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Phone: (508) 881-2000
Toll Free: (800) 872-6527
Fax: (508) 881-8920

P/N 06-236529-001 i December 2004


TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

AAM: Addressable Alarmline Module LCD: Liquid Crystal Display

AC: Alternating Current LED: Light Emitting Diode


ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act MEA: Materials and Equipment Acceptance
Division of the City of New York
AH: Ampere Hour NAC: Notification Appliance Circuit
AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction N.C.: Normally Closed
AI: Addressable Monitor Module NEC: National Electrical Code

AIM: AnaLASER Interface Module NFPA: National Fire Protection Association

AO: Addressable Relay N.O.: Normally Open

ASM Addressable Signal Module PAS: Positive Alarm Sequence


ATM-L: Annunciator Driver Module PCB: Printed Circuit Board
ATM-R: Relay Driver Module pF: Pico-farads
AWG: American Wire Gauge P/N: Part Number
BPM: Beats per Minute RAM: Random Access Memory

CPU: Central Processing Unit RDCM: Remote Display/Control Module


CSFM: California State Fire Marshal RF: Radio-Frequency
DACT: Digital Alarm Comm. Transmitter SLC: Signaling Line Circuit

DC: Direct Current SMPS: Switching Mode Power Supply


EOC: Event Output Control TB: Terminal Block
EOLD: End of Line Device UL/ULI: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
FCS: FENWALNET Configuration Software V: Volts
FM/FMRC: Factory Mutual (Research Corporation) Vac: Volts AC
Ft.: Feet Vdc: Volts DC
HSD: High Sensitivity Smoke Detector VRMS: Volts Root Mean Square
HSSD: High Sensitivity Smoke Detector
Hz: Hertz (Frequency)
IRI: Industrial Risk Insurers

December 2004 ii P/N 06-236529-001


SAFETY SUMMARY
This entire manual must be read and understood before installation.
Installation Precautions Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term
reliability:

WARNING Several different sources of power can be connected to this fire alarm control unit.
Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment
may be damaged by servicing while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to install,
service, or operate this control unit until this manual is read and understood.

System Re-acceptance Test after Re-Programming: To ensure proper system operation, this
system must be retested in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 10 after any programming
CAUTION change. Re-acceptance testing is also required after any addition or deletion of system
components, and after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits and system operations known to be affected by a change must be
100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least
10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50
devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.

This system meets UL/FM requirements for operation at 32°-120°F (0 to 49°C) and at a relative humidity of 93%
(non-condensing) @ 90°F (32.2°C). However, the useful life of the system’s standby batteries and the electronic
components may be adversely effected by continuous operation at these environmental limits. Therefore, it is
recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room
temperature of 60-80°F.
Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to
lightning induced transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interference,
proper grounding will reduce susceptibility. The use of overhead or outside aerial wiring is not
recommended due to the increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Applications
Engineering Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered.
Do not install electronic assemblies prior to mounting and attaching conduit for field wiring to the enclosure.
Before making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery and printed circuit board locations. Do
not over tighten screw terminals. Over tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact
pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal.
This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before
handling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect
electronic assemblies removed from the control unit.
Follow the instructions in this manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control unit
and associated equipment. System operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.
Fire Alarm System Limitations While installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance
rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance!
An automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, notification
appliances, and a fire alarm control unit with remote-notification capability – can provide early warning of a developing
fire. Such a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire.
Any fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons:
Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in walls, on
roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors on one level also may not sense a fire on another level
or floor of a building. A second floor detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire.
Furthermore, all types of smoke detectors, both ionization and photoelectric types, have sensing limitations. No type of
smoke detector can sense every kind of fire caused by carelessness and safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent
explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with
matches, or arson.

P/N 06-236529-001 iii December 2004


SAFETY SUMMARY (CONT.)
Notification appliances, such as bells, may not alert people if these appliances are located on the other side of
closed or partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building.
A fire alarm system will not operate without electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from
standby batteries only for a specified time.
Rate-of-Rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature
of each detector should be tested by a qualified fire protection specialist as recommended in NFPA 72, Chapter 10.
Auxiliary Equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible with the control unit. It is essential to
use only equipment listed for service with your control unit.
Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of
service or temporarily disabled.
The most common cause of fire alarm malfunctions, however, is inadequate maintenance. All devices and system
wiring should be tested and maintained by professional fire alarm installers following written procedures supplied
with each device. System inspection and testing should be scheduled monthly or as required by national and/or
local fire codes. Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept.

GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES The following must be observed to maintain personnel safety.
The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing in the manual. The
safety precautions in this section must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance. This
manual is to be used by trained distributors/technicians. The entire manual should be read and fully understood
prior to installation.

FIRST AID
Any injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention
immediately.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The following general safety precautions are to be observed at all times:
1. All electrical components associated with equipment shall be installed and grounded in accordance with
NEC and local regulatory requirements.
2. Special precautionary measures are essential to prevent applying power to equipment at any time mainte-
nance work is in progress.
3. Before working on electrical equipment, use a voltmeter to ensure that system is not energized.
4. When working near electricity, do not use metal rulers, flashlights, metallic pencils, or any other objects hav-
ing exposed conductive material.
5. When connecting a meter to terminals for measurement, use a voltage range higher than expected voltage to
be measured.

CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS

A caution identifies a procedure, practice, or statement, which, if not strictly followed, could
result in programming errors, impairment of equipment operation, or equipment damage.
CAUTION

A warning identifies an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, condition or


statement, which, if not strictly followed, could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING

December 2004 iv P/N 06-236529-001


NOTICE TO USERS, INSTALLERS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION AND ALL OTHER INVOLVED
PARTIES

This product incorporates field-programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the requirements in
the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864, certain programming features or
options must be limited to specific values or not used at all as indicated below:
Program Feature or Option Permitted in Possible Settings Settings Permitted in
UL 864(Y/N) UL 864
Ionization Detectors reporting as N 0.5 – 1.5% per foot Report as alarm initiating
supervisory initiating devices devices only
Photoelectric Detectors reporting as N 0.5 – 3.5% per foot Report as alarm initiating
supervisory initiating devices devices only
Abort switches may be set up to Y (#2 only) 1 – 300 second delay 1 – 60 second delay
operate in any of the following ways:
1. Reset to initial delay setting.
Resume countdown for entire
delay period.
2. Count down to 10 seconds and
hold. Resume countdown at 10
seconds.
3. Hold at time remaining. Resume
countdown at remaining time
period.
4. Same as #2, except disable
abort function if countdown
timer has started.
5. Special New York City operation.
Delayed off premises trouble trans- Y 0 – 12 hours 0 – 3 hours
missions for AC power loss.
Monitor module acting as a silence Y May be used as a stand Must have visible indication
switch. alone initiating device, or at monitor module that out-
may be used with visible puts have been silenced.
indication that shows when
outputs are silenced.
Monitor module acting as an Y May be used as a stand Must have visible display at
acknowledge switch. alone initiating device, or monitor module that shows
may be used with a display what is being acknowledged.
that shows when events are
being acknowledged.

P/N 06-236529-001 v December 2004


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

December 2004 vi P/N 06-236529-001


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Name Page Number


Foreword ............................................................................................................................ i
Terms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................... ii
Safety Summary ................................................................................................................. iii
Table of Contents................................................................................................................ vii
List of Figures..................................................................................................................... xi
List of Tables ...................................................................................................................... xv

CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW


1-1 System Description................................................................................................. 1-1
1-1.1 Standard Features .................................................................................................. 1-2
1-2 Control Unit Components ....................................................................................... 1-3
1-2.1 Display.................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-2.1.1 LCD and LEDs........................................................................................................ 1-3
1-2.1.2 Operator Control Keys ............................................................................................ 1-3
1-2.1.3 Digit and Functionality Keys ................................................................................... 1-4
1-2.2 Printed-Circuit Board (PCB) ................................................................................... 1-4
1-2.3 FENWALNET 6000 Cabinet .................................................................................... 1-5
1-2.4 Power-Supply/Battery-Charger Assembly ................................................................ 1-5
1-2.4.1 Batteries ................................................................................................................. 1-6
1-3 Optional Devices ..................................................................................................... 1-6
1-3.1 Remote Display/Control Module (RDCM) ................................................................ 1-6
1-3.2 ATM Series Driver Modules .................................................................................... 1-7
1-3.2.1 Model ATM-L Annunicator Driver Module .............................................................. 1-7
1-3.2.2 Model ATM-R Relay Driver Module ......................................................................... 1-7
1-3.3 Trim Ring ............................................................................................................... 1-8
1-4 SmartOne™ Detectors............................................................................................. 1-8
1-4.1 SmartOne Ionization Smoke Detector, Model CPD-7052 ........................................ 1-8
1-4.2 SmartOne Photoelectric Smoke Detector, Model PSD-7152.................................... 1-9
1-4.3 SmartOne Thermal Detector, Model THD-7252 ...................................................... 1-9
1-4.4 Detector Bases ........................................................................................................ 1-9
1-4.4.1 Flanged Detector Base, Model 6SB ......................................................................... 1-9
1-4.4.2 Flangeless Detector Base, Model 4SB...................................................................... 1-10
1-4.5 Detector Base Adapter, Model MA-002.................................................................... 1-10
1-4.6 Duct Housing, Model DH-2000 ............................................................................... 1-10
1-5 SmartOne Addressable Modules ............................................................................. 1-11
1-5.1 Addressable Monitor Module, Model AI .................................................................. 1-11
1-5.2 AnaLASER II Interface Module, Model AIM ............................................................. 1-12
1-5.3 Addressable AlarmLine Module, Model AAM .......................................................... 1-12
1-5.4 Addressable Relay Module, Model AO..................................................................... 1-12
1-5.5 Addressable Signal Modules, Models ASM and ASM-6SB ....................................... 1-13
1-6 Isolator Modules ..................................................................................................... 1-13
1-7 Specifications.......................................................................................................... 1-14
1-7.1 Electrical Specifications .......................................................................................... 1-14
1-7.1.1 Primary AC Power................................................................................................... 1-14
1-7.1.2 Battery and Charging Circuit .................................................................................. 1-14
1-7.1.3 Signaling Line Circuit ............................................................................................. 1-14

P/N 06-236529-001 vii December 2004


TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
1-7.2 Mechanical Specifications........................................................................................1-14
1-7.3 Environmental Specifications ..................................................................................1-14
1-7.4 Notification-Appliance and Releasing Circuits .........................................................1-15
1-7.5 Relays......................................................................................................................1-15
1-7.6 Auxiliary Outputs ....................................................................................................1-15
1-7.7 Electrical Supervision .............................................................................................1-16

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
2-1 Preparing for Installation.........................................................................................2-1
2-1.1 Control-Unit Components .......................................................................................2-1
2-1.2 Materials/Tools Required ........................................................................................2-1
2-1.3 Determining Installation Location ...........................................................................2-1
2-2 Codes and Standards ..............................................................................................2-2
2-3 Installation Overview ...............................................................................................2-3
2-3.1 Step One: Installing the Control Unit Back Box and Preparing Electrical Wiring .....2-3
2-3.2 Step Two: Installing the FENWALNET 6000 Power Supply and Main PCB..............2-3
2-3.3 Step Three: Connecting AC Power and Standby Battery ..........................................2-3
2-3.4 Step Four: Auto-Configuring the System .................................................................2-3
2-3.5 Step Five: Uploading the Application Program and Performing the Pre-Test ...........2-4
2-3.6 Step Six: Performing Final System Test and Commissioning the System ................2-4
2-3.7 Step Seven: Installing the Actuation Devices and Extinguishing System ..................2-4
2-3.8 Step Eight: Performing Final Installation Procedures ..............................................2-4
2-4 Mounting the Cabinet/Enclosure..............................................................................2-4
2-4.1 Preparing the Enclosure for Wall Mounting .............................................................2-5
2-4.2 Surface Mounting ....................................................................................................2-5
2-4.3 Semi-Flush Mounting ..............................................................................................2-6
2-5 Installing the Power Supply .....................................................................................2-7
2-6 Installing the Printed Circuit Board (PCB)...............................................................2-8
2-7 AC and DC Power Connections................................................................................2-10
2-7.1 AC Power Connection ..............................................................................................2-10
2-7.2 DC Power Connection..............................................................................................2-11
2-8 Signaling Line Circuit ..............................................................................................2-12
2-8.1 SLC Wiring Requirements .......................................................................................2-12
2-8.1.1 Class-B, Style-4 Wiring Requirements .....................................................................2-12
2-8.1.2 Class-A, Style-6 Wiring Requirements .....................................................................2-15
2-8.1.3 Special Class-A, Style-7 Requirements ....................................................................2-17
2-9 Notification Appliance Circuits ................................................................................2-18
2-10 Combination Circuits ..............................................................................................2-19
2-10.1 Combination Circuits used as NACs ........................................................................2-19
2-10.2 Combination Circuits used as Releasing Circuits ....................................................2-20
2-11 Releasing Circuits....................................................................................................2-21
2-11.1 Releasing Circuits for Series-Wired Initiator Assemblies .........................................2-21
2-11.2 Releasing Circuits for Single Control Head or Solenoid Valve..................................2-22
2-11.3 Releasing Circuits for Dual Control Heads or Solenoid Valves ................................2-23
2-12 Auxiliary Power Outputs..........................................................................................2-23
2-13 RS-485 Communications Circuit.............................................................................2-24
2-14 Relays......................................................................................................................2-27

December 2004 viii P/N 06-236529-001


TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
2-15 RS-232 Communications Port ................................................................................ 2-28
2-16 USB Communications Port ..................................................................................... 2-29

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM OPERATIONS


3-1 FENWALNET 6000 System Operations overview .................................................... 3-1
3-2 System Operation ................................................................................................... 3-1
3-2.1 Operating States ..................................................................................................... 3-1
3-2.2 Outputs Activation .................................................................................................. 3-1
3-2.3 Operator Keys ......................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2.4 Status Indicating LEDs ........................................................................................... 3-4
3-2.5 Operating Instructions ............................................................................................ 3-5
3-2.5.1 Normal Operation ................................................................................................... 3-5
3-2.5.2 Menu Operation ...................................................................................................... 3-5
3-2.5.2.1 Menu Functions ...................................................................................................... 3-6
3-2.5.2.2 Isolate Menu Functions ........................................................................................... 3-13
3-2.5.2.3 List Menu Functions ............................................................................................... 3-19
3-2.5.2.4 Set Menu Functions ................................................................................................ 3-26
3-2.5.2.5 Test Menu Functions .............................................................................................. 3-54
3-2.5.2.6 System Passwords .................................................................................................. 3-66
3-2.5.3 Trouble State .......................................................................................................... 3-67
3-2.5.3.1 What to Do When a Trouble Occurs ........................................................................ 3-68
3-2.5.3.2 Trouble Resound .................................................................................................... 3-68
3-2.5.3.3 How to Reset the Control Unit After a Trouble Condition........................................ 3-69
3-2.5.4 Alarm State............................................................................................................. 3-69
3-2.5.4.1 What to Do When an Alarm Occurs......................................................................... 3-69
3-2.5.4.2 Alarm Silencing ...................................................................................................... 3-70
3-2.5.4.3 Non-Latching Operation .......................................................................................... 3-71
3-2.5.4.4 FENWALNET 6000 Alarm-Off Messages ................................................................. 3-71
3-2.5.4.5 What to Do When an Alarm-Off Message is Displayed ............................................. 3-72
3-2.5.4.6 When to Use Non-Latching Initiating Devices .......................................................... 3-72
3-2.5.4.7 Alarm Display Limitation ........................................................................................ 3-72
3-2.5.4.8 How To Reset the Control Unit After an Alarm Condition ....................................... 3-73
3-2.5.5 Special Alarm Conditions ....................................................................................... 3-74
3-2.5.5.1 Positive Alarm Sequence ......................................................................................... 3-74
3-2.5.5.2 What to Do When PAS Occurs................................................................................. 3-75
3-2.5.5.3 Alarm Verification................................................................................................... 3-75
3-2.5.5.4 What to Do When Alarm Verification Occurs........................................................... 3-76
3-2.5.6 Supervisory State.................................................................................................... 3-76
3-2.5.6.1 What to Do When a Supervisory Event Occurs ........................................................ 3-77
3-2.5.6.2 How To Reset the Control Unit After a Supervisory Condition ................................ 3-77
3-2.5.7 Pre-Alarm State ...................................................................................................... 3-78
3-2.5.7.1 What to Do When a Pre-Alarm Occurs .................................................................... 3-79
3-2.5.7.2 Pre-Alarm Silencing ................................................................................................ 3-79
3-2.5.7.3 How to Reset the Control Unit After a Pre-Alarm Condition .................................... 3-79
3-2.5.8 Concurrent States ................................................................................................... 3-80
3-2.5.8.1 Alarm Events .......................................................................................................... 3-80
3-2.5.8.2 Hierarchy for Display of Concurrent Events............................................................ 3-82

P/N 06-236529-001 ix December 2004


TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
3-2.5.8.3 How Concurrent Events Are Displayed ....................................................................3-82
3-2.5.8.4 What to Do When a Level-1 Message is Displayed ....................................................3-84
3-2.5.8.5 Level-2 Event Display ..............................................................................................3-84
3-2.5.8.6 What to Do When Level-2 Messages are Displayed...................................................3-85
3-2.5.8.7 Level-3 and Lower-Level Event Display....................................................................3-86
3-2.5.8.8 What to Do When Level-3 and Lower-Level Messages are Displayed ........................3-86
3-2.5.8.9 Level-3 Display Limitations .....................................................................................3-87
3-2.6 System Start-Up ......................................................................................................3-88
3-2.6.1 Preliminary Procedures ...........................................................................................3-88
3-2.6.2 Initial Power-Up and Control-Unit Checkout ...........................................................3-88
3-2.6.3 Initial Signaling-Line-Circuit Configuration .............................................................3-90
3-2.6.4 Site-Specific Programming ......................................................................................3-92
3-2.6.4.1 System Configuration via the Auto-Setup Routine ...................................................3-92
3-2.6.4.2 System Configuration via the FCS Configuration Program.......................................3-92

CHAPTER 4 INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE


4-1 Scheduled System Maintenance ..............................................................................4-1
4-2 Semi-Annual and Annual Testing ............................................................................4-1
4-2.1 Lamp Test ...............................................................................................................4-1
4-2.2 Battery Test.............................................................................................................4-1
4-2.3 Initiating-Devices Test .............................................................................................4-2
4-2.4 Walk Test ................................................................................................................4-2
4-3 Sequence of Operation ............................................................................................4-2

CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-1 Introduction ............................................................................................................5-1

CHAPTER 6 PARTS LIST


6-1 Introduction ............................................................................................................6-1

December 2004 x P/N 06-236529-001


LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Name Page Number
1-1 Typical FENWALNET 6000 System .......................................................................................... 1-1
1-2 FENWALNET 6000 Display ...................................................................................................... 1-3
1-3 FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit Printed Circuit Board............................................................ 1-4
1-4 FENWALNET 6000 Cabinet ...................................................................................................... 1-5
1-5 Power-Supply Assembly............................................................................................................ 1-6
1-6 Remote Display/Control Module ............................................................................................... 1-6
1-7 ATM Series Driver Modules ...................................................................................................... 1-7
1-8 Trim Ring ................................................................................................................................. 1-8
1-9 SmartOne™ Smoke Detector .................................................................................................... 1-8
1-10 THD-7252 Thermal Detector .................................................................................................... 1-9
1-11 6SB Detector Base (Flanged) .................................................................................................... 1-9
1-12 4SB Detector Base (Flangeless)................................................................................................. 1-10
1-13 MA-002 Detector Base Adapter ................................................................................................. 1-10
1-14 DH-2000 Duct-Detector Housing .............................................................................................. 1-11
1-15 AI Monitor Module.................................................................................................................... 1-11
1-16 AnaLASER II Interface Module ................................................................................................. 1-12
1-17 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................ 1-12
1-18 AO Relay Module ...................................................................................................................... 1-12
1-19 ASM Addressable Signal Module .............................................................................................. 1-13
1-20 Isolator Modules ....................................................................................................................... 1-13

2-1 Enclosure Dimensions.............................................................................................................. 2-4


2-2 Back Box Mounting Dimensions ............................................................................................... 2-5
2-3 Semi-Flush Mounting Dimensions ............................................................................................ 2-6
2-4 Power Supply Unit .................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-5 Primary Power Selection Switch ............................................................................................... 2-8
2-6 PCB Installation........................................................................................................................ 2-8
2-7 PCB-to-Cabinet Grounding Diagram ......................................................................................... 2-9
2-8 Primary-Power Connections...................................................................................................... 2-11
2-9 Standby Battery Connections.................................................................................................... 2-12
2-10 Measuring Class-B SLC Wiring Resistance................................................................................ 2-13
2-11 Measuring Class-B SLC Wiring Capacitance ............................................................................. 2-13
2-12 Class-B, Style-4 Signaling Line Circuit...................................................................................... 2-14
2-13 Measuring Class-A SLC Wiring Resistance................................................................................ 2-15
2-14 Measuring Class-A SLC Wiring Capacitance.............................................................................. 2-15
2-15 Class-A, Style-6 Signaling Line Circuit ...................................................................................... 2-16
2-16 Class-A, Style-7 Signaling Line Circuit ...................................................................................... 2-17
2-17 Class-A, Style-Z Notification-Appliance Circuit ......................................................................... 2-18
2-18 Class-B, Style-Y Notification-Appliance Circuit ......................................................................... 2-18
2-19 Wiring Length vs. Notification-Appliance Current ..................................................................... 2-19
2-20 Combination Circuit used as Class-A, Style-Z NAC................................................................... 2-20
2-21 Combination Circuit used as Class-B, Style-Y NAC ................................................................... 2-20
2-22 Combination Circuit used as Releasing Circuit ......................................................................... 2-21
2-23 Releasing-Circuit Wiring for Initiators....................................................................................... 2-22
2-24 Releasing-Circuit Wiring for Single Solenoid............................................................................. 2-22
2-25 Releasing-Circuit Wiring for Dual Solenoids ............................................................................. 2-23
2-26 Auxiliary-Power Terminals ....................................................................................................... 2-24
2-27 Single-Channel RS-485 Wiring to Peripheral Devices................................................................ 2-25
2-28 Dual-Channel RS-485 Wiring to Peripheral Devices .................................................................. 2-26
2-29 24 Vdc-Power Wiring Length vs. Peripheral-Devices Current .................................................... 2-27
2-30 Programmable and Trouble Relays........................................................................................... 2-27
2-31 RS-232 Communications Ports................................................................................................. 2-28
2-32 USB Communications Port ....................................................................................................... 2-29

P/N 06-236529-001 xi December 2004


LIST OF FIGURES (CONT.)
Figure Name Page Number
3-1 Display Panel ............................................................................................................................3-2
3-2 Normal Operation Display.........................................................................................................3-5
3-3 Main Menu Functions................................................................................................................3-6
3-4 FENWALNET 6000 Menu Functions and Top-Level Displays....................................................3-7
3-5 Menu Functions ........................................................................................................................3-9
3-6 Menu Functions Cont. ...............................................................................................................3-11
3-7 Typical Trouble Message Display ..............................................................................................3-67
3-8 Typical Message After Manual Trouble Scroll Cycle ..................................................................3-68
3-9 24-Hour Trouble Reminder Message.........................................................................................3-68
3-10 Typical Alarm Message Display .................................................................................................3-69
3-11 Typical Message After Alarm Manual Scroll Cycle .....................................................................3-70
3-12 Outputs Silenced Message.........................................................................................................3-70
3-13 Typical Alarm Off Message ........................................................................................................3-71
3-14 Message After All Alarm-Off Reports are Acknowledged ............................................................3-72
3-15 Alarm Events Buffer Full Message for New Alarm Event ...........................................................3-72
3-16 Alarm Events Buffer Full Message After Manual Scroll Cycle ....................................................3-73
3-17 Typical PAS Message Display ....................................................................................................3-74
3-18 PAS Acknowledgment Message..................................................................................................3-75
3-19 Typical Alarm Verification Message Display ..............................................................................3-75
3-20 Alarm Verification Acknowledgment Message............................................................................3-76
3-21 Typical Supervisory Message Display ........................................................................................3-76
3-22 Message After Manual Supervisory Scroll Cycle ........................................................................3-77
3-23 Typical Pre-Alarm-Message Display...........................................................................................3-78
3-24 Outputs-Silenced Message.........................................................................................................3-79
3-25 Typical Countdown-to-Release Display......................................................................................3-82
3-26 Typical Release Message ...........................................................................................................3-83
3-27 Typical Display after Acknowledgment of Release Message .......................................................3-83
3-28 Typical Display After Abort-Switch Operation ...........................................................................3-84
3-29 Typical Display When Manually Scrolling Through Level-1/-2 Events........................................3-84
3-30 Typical Multiple Level-2 Event-Type Display .............................................................................3-85
3-31 Typical Display When Manually Scrolling Through Level-2 Events............................................3-85
3-32 Typical Multiple Lower-Level Event Display ..............................................................................3-86
3-33 Typical Level-3 and Lower-Level Events Display .......................................................................3-86
3-34 Lower-Level-Events-Buffer-Full Message for New Event.............................................................3-87
3-35 Lower Level Events Buffer Full Message After Manual Scroll Cycle ...........................................3-87
3-36 Initial Power-Up Message ..........................................................................................................3-88
3-37 Initialization Message ................................................................................................................3-88
3-38 Boot-Up Message.......................................................................................................................3-89
3-39 Password Prompt......................................................................................................................3-89
3-40 Top-Level Menu Selections........................................................................................................3-89
3-41 Set Menu...................................................................................................................................3-89
3-42 Time/Date Sub-Menu ................................................................................................................3-89
3-43 Sub-Menu for Time-Display Format ..........................................................................................3-89
3-44 Sub-Menu to Enter Current Time..............................................................................................3-90
3-45 Sub-Menu to Complete Current-Time Entry..............................................................................3-90
3-46 Time/Date Sub-Menu ................................................................................................................3-90
3-47 Sub-Menu to Enter Current Date ..............................................................................................3-90
3-48 Typical Device Not Registered Message .....................................................................................3-91
3-49 Password Prompt......................................................................................................................3-91

December 2004 xii P/N 06-236529-001


LIST OF FIGURES (CONT.)
Figure Name Page Number
3-50 Top-Level Menu Selections ....................................................................................................... 3-91
3-51 Set Menu .................................................................................................................................. 3-91
3-52 Additional Set-Menu Selections ................................................................................................ 3-91
3-53 Programming Sub-Menu........................................................................................................... 3-91
3-54 Typical Auto-Learn In-Process Display ..................................................................................... 3-91
3-55 Typical Auto-Learn Complete Display ....................................................................................... 3-92

4-1 Device/Circuit Assignments....................................................................................................... 4-3


4-2 Sequence of Operation.............................................................................................................. 4-3

P/N 06-236529-001 xiii December 2004


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

December 2004 xiv P/N 06-236529-001


LIST OF TABLES
Table Name Page Number
2-1 FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit Maximum Peripheral Devices................................................ 2-24
2-2 RJ12 Socket Pin Signals........................................................................................................... 2-28

3-1 Off-Normal Mode Operating States ........................................................................................... 3-1


3-2 Operator Control Keys and Functions ...................................................................................... 3-3
3-3 System Status LEDs and Functions.......................................................................................... 3-4
3-4 Main Menu Functions and Descriptions ................................................................................... 3-6
3-5 Password Levels and Descriptions............................................................................................ 3-67
3-6 FENWALNET 6000 Password Levels ........................................................................................ 3-67
3-7 Progressive Alarm States of a FENWALNET 6000 System
Designed for Property Protection/Mission Continuity................................................................ 3-81

3-8 Priority Levels for Different Types of Concurrent Events .......................................................... 3-82
5-1 General System Events ............................................................................................................. 5-1
5-2 Control-Unit-Based-Output Events ........................................................................................... 5-6
5-3 SLC Events ............................................................................................................................... 5-8
5-4 Remote-Display/Annunciator Events ......................................................................................... 5-15

6-1 FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit and Replacement Sub-Assemblies......................................... 6-1


6-2 External Modules...................................................................................................................... 6-1
6-3 SLC Initiating and Control Devices ........................................................................................... 6-2
6-4 Notification Appliances ............................................................................................................. 6-2
6-5 Batteries ................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6-6 Miscellaneous ........................................................................................................................... 6-4

P/N 06-236529-001 xv December 2004


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

December 2004 xvi P/N 06-236529-001


LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A
Battery Calculations .................................................................................................................................A-1

APPENDIX B
Wiring Requirements for FENWALNET 6000 Signaling Line Circuit.........................................................B-1

APPENDIX C
Listed and Approved Releasing Devices ....................................................................................................C-1

APPENDIX D
Device-Programmer Operating Instructions..............................................................................................D-1

APPENDIX E
Routings for Power-Limited and
Non-Power-Limited Wiring........................................................................................................................E-1

APPENDIX F
Central-Station Operation.........................................................................................................................F-1

APPENDIX G

Factory Mutual Requirements for Pre-Action and Deluge Sprinkler Systems ..........................................G-1

P/N 06-236529-001 xvii December 2004


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

December 2004 xviii P/N 06-236529-001


System Overview

CHAPTER 1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1-1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The FENWALNET™ 6000 Control Unit is an intelligent control unit in a compact housing for fire
suppression system and/or fire-alarm system applications. The control unit uses a single printed
circuit board (PCB) design and a switching power supply. A keypad display membrane (hereinafter
referred to as the display) is mounted to the PCB for system status and user operation.

The FENWALNET 6000 has one signaling line circuit (SLC) that can communicate with up to
255 intelligent devices.

See Figure 1-1 for a typical fire suppression system application.

POWER ON TM
ACKNOWLEDGE 1 2 3

ALARM
SILENCE 4 5 6
PRE-ALARM

TROUBLE
RESET 7 8 9
SUPERVISORY
R

SILENCE SCROLL 0

RDCM

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
400 MAIN ST. ASHLAND, MA 01721
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GND
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED N/C COM N/O (+) (-) (+) (-)
ANALASER II INTERFACE MODULE RXTX
PART. NO. 89-300010-001
PC PC PC PC
OUT

ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED


MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F

TERMINALS 5-7 ARE POWER LIMITED


TERMINALS 1-4 ARE POWER LIMITED
DATE OF MANUFACTURE:

MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F


FOR SERVICE SEND TO:

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED

SmartOne TM

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001

TM
ASHLAND, MA 01721

FOR SERVICE SEND TO:


RXTX

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-408004-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721
MODEL AI, N/O

INSTRUCTIONS
SEE INSTALLATION

SmartOne
06-235578-001

INSTRUCTIONS
IN

SEE INSTALLATION

06-235577-001
MODEL AO
400 MAIN ST.

400 MAIN ST.


CPD 7052 PSD 7152 THD 7252 AI AO FM
APPROVED
FENWALNETTMADDRESS

AIM

LIFT

FIRE
ALARM
Manual Release Station

AnaLASER II

Pre-Alarm/Pre-Release
Notification Appliance

R
A E
G
E
L
E
Agent-Release
N
T
A
S
Notification Appliance
E

6000

Special Extinguishing System


Pre-Action-Sprinkler System

Figure 1-1. Typical FENWALNET 6000 System

P/N 06-236529-001 1-1 December 2004


System Overview

The FENWALNET 6000 coordinates the operations of the varied components of a protected-premises
fire protection or notification system. These operations include:
• Interpreting initiating signals from automatic detectors or monitor modules. Initiating signals
can be any of the following:
– Automatic detector pre-alarm
– Automatic detector alarm
– Manual alarm
– Manual extinguishing-system release
– Extinguishing-system abort
– Sprinkler-system waterflow
– Sprinkler-system supervisory
– Point-specific trouble report
• Annunciating the initiating-device report, or any other system event, via the display and
associated peripheral annunciation equipment
• Notifying the occupants of an emergency situation
• Activating control equipment to aid with building evacuation or to prepare an area for special-
extinguishing-system discharge
• Discharging the special-extinguishing system, if necessary
• Actuating ancillary equipment to call the fire department
• Warning of any trouble condition that could inhibit alarm transmission or annunciation or whose
occurrence could prevent the system from carrying out its mission.

1-1.1 Standard Features

The following standard features are incorporated in the control unit's single-printed-circuit-
board design:
• One (1) signaling-line circuit (SLC) for Class-A, Style -6 or -7 or Class-B, Style-4 operation
• 255 intelligent-device capacity
• Two (2) notification-appliance circuits (NACs) for Class-A, Style-Z or Class-B,
Style-Y operation. Each NAC is capable of creating the following master-coded patterns
for audible notification appliances: 60 beats per minute (bpm), 120 bpm, temporal
pattern per ANSI S3.41, and steady activation.
• Two (2) releasing circuits for electro-explosive initiators or solenoid-operated control
heads and valves
• Two (2) field-configurable outputs for notification appliances or solenoid-operated
control heads and valves. Each output operates in Class-A, Style-Z or Class-B, Style-Y
manner when configured as a NAC, and is capable of creating the following master-coded
patterns for audible notification appliances: 60 beats per minute (bpm), 120 bpm,
temporal pattern per ANSI S3.41, and steady activation.
• One (1) unpowered, Form-C relay contact for trouble conditions
• Three (3) programmable, unpowered, Form-C relay contacts
• One (1) RS-485 communications circuit for remote-display units or
annunciator-driver modules
• One (1) USB-style communications port for device capability
• Two (2) RS-232 serial-style communications ports
• One (1) operator interface with 80-character liquid-crystal display, status-indicating
LEDs and control/numeric keys

A switching power supply is located behind the printed-circuit board and supplies 5.4 A @
24 Vdc to support the basic control unit and its associated peripheral devices and to charge

December 2004 1-2 P/N 06-236529-001


System Overview

the standby battery. The switching power supply is user-configurable to operate from either
120 or 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz primary power.

1-2 CONTROL UNIT COMPONENTS

The FENWALNET 6000 System includes:


• Display
• Printed Circuit Board (PCB)
• Cabinet
• Power Supply/Battery Charger Assembly

Optional devices includes:


• Remote Display/Control Module (RDCM)
• ATM Series Driver Module (ATM-L/-R)
• Trim Ring

1-2.1 Display

The display has control switches, system status LEDs, an 80 character (2 x 40) LCD for event
annunciation and an integral numeric keypad. The keypad is used for entering the security
password and navigating through the user menus.

80 Character Liquid Crystal Display


with LED Back Lighting (2 Lines x 40 Characters)

POWER ON TM
ACKNOWLEDGE 1 2 3 12-key numeric /
ALARM BACKSPACE/
SILENCE 4 5 6 ENTER keypad
PRE-ALARM

TROUBLE
RESET 7 8 9
SUPERVISORY

SILENCE
R

SCROLL 0 <ENTER> Key

System Status LEDs Operator Control Keys <BACKSPACE> Key

Figure 1-2. FENWALNET 6000 Display

The following paragraphs describe the different parts of the display.


1-2.1.1 LCD AND LEDS
A window for the 80-character (two lines by 40 characters each) LCD and six system-
status LEDs. The six system-status LEDs are:
• Power On (green)
• Alarm (red)
• Pre-Alarm (yellow)
• Trouble (yellow)
• Supervisory (yellow)
• Silence (yellow)
1-2.1.2 OPERATOR CONTROL KEYS
The operator control keys are:
• Acknowledge

P/N 06-236529-001 1-3 December 2004


System Overview

• Silence
• Reset
• Scroll
1-2.1.3 DIGIT AND FUNCTIONALITY KEYS
The 12-position keypad has the following digit and functionality keys:
• Digits, 0-9
• Backspace
• Enter
Refer to Chapter 3 for system operations using the display.

1-2.2 Printed-Circuit Board (PCB)

The FENWALNET 6000’s Printed Circuit Board (PCB) contains the system’s central processing
unit (CPU) and all of the primary circuits. The PCB is packaged separately and shipped inside
the control-unit's enclosure. Figure 1-3 shows the layout of the PCB, including terminals for
external components, the operator interface, and connectors.

USB Port
RS-485 Terminals (J6)
(TB15)
RS-232 Serial Port
SLC Terminals B (J3)
(TB1)
RS-232 Serial Port
TB1 TB15 A (J8)
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

J3 J5 RS-232 A
SLC RS 485
USB B
RS-232 B J8 Keypad/Display
Membrane
NO NC C
Relay 1

TB4

Prog. Relay No. 1


NO NC C
Relay 2 Relay 3 Trouble

TB8

Prog. Relay No. 2


TM

POWER ON 1 2 3
NO NC C

ACKNOWLEDGE
TB9

Prog. Relay No. 3 ALARM


SILENCE 4 5 6
PRE-ALARM
NO NC C

TB10

Trouble Relay TROUBLE RESET 7 8 9

J10 SUPERVISORY
Style 4

SLC-Style Switch
R

SILENCE SCROLL 0
S2

(S2)
Notification
Appliance
Circuit No. 2
1 2 3 4
NAC 2

(TB14)
TB3
- -

TB14
Battery Terminals + Notification
(TB3)
1 2 3 4
NAC 1

+
Batt Out
Appliance
AC Supply Select Switch Circuit No. 1
(S4) TB5 (TB5)
PSU
J12
N

240
AC IN

AC Input Terminals Release 1 Release 2 Aux 24 VDC Combo 1 Combo 2 Buzzer


L

(TB13) 120 TB11 TB2 TB7 TB6


TB13 TB12 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Release Circuit No. 1


(TB12) Programmable Release/
Notification-Appliance
Release Circuit No. 2 Programmable Release/ Circuit No. 2
(TB11) Notification-Appliance (TB6)
24 VDC Auxiliary-Power Circuit No. 1 (TB7)
Terminals (TB2)

Figure 1-3. FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit Printed Circuit Board

December 2004 1-4 P/N 06-236529-001


System Overview

1-2.3 FENWALNET 6000 Cabinet

The PCB mounts in a compact (19.50” x 14.25” x 5.00”) cabinet. The cabinet is key locked, and
provides space for two batteries (up to 12 AH).

19.50 in.

12-V Battery (12 AH) 12-V Battery (12 AH)

14.25 in.

Figure 1-4. FENWALNET 6000 Cabinet

1-2.4 Power-Supply/Battery-Charger Assembly

The power-supply/battery-charger assembly is an AC to DC switching power-supply unit that


provides a total output of 5.4 A @ 27 Vdc. The power supply unit is user configurable for either
120 Vac or 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz line voltage and its DC output is both filtered and regulated. The
power supply/battery-charger assembly can charge standby batteries of up to 70 AH capacity.

The power-supply/battery-charger assembly is packaged separately and shipped inside the


control unit’s enclosure. Figure 1-5 shows the placement of the power-supply/battery-charger
assembly in the FENWALNET 6000’s back box.

P/N 06-236529-001 1-5 December 2004


System Overview

AC Selector PSU Warning Label


Switch

To Printed-Circuit
Board PSU
Connector J12

Power Supply Earth-Ground Terminal

Earth-Ground Terminal for Ground


(i.e., Green) Wire of AC-Power Supply

Figure 1-5. Power-Supply Assembly


1-2.4.1 BATTERIES
The cabinet provides space for two 12-AH batteries. Use a separate battery
enclosure, P/N 74-600000-014 (Blue) or P/N 74-600000-514 (Red), for 17-AH or larger
batteries. Batteries must be ordered separately.

1-3 OPTIONAL DEVICES

Several optional devices and modules can be used with the FENWALNET 6000.

1-3.1 Remote Display/Control Module (RDCM)

The remote display control module permits system events to be displayed, and operator
intervention to be accomplished, from more than one location in a facility. Remote display
control module, Model RDCM, is a duplicate of the FENWALNET 6000’s Display/Control
Module and allows full operator intervention and system control.

TM
POWER ON ACKNOWLEDGE 1 2 3

ALARM
SILENCE 4 5 6
PRE-ALARM

TROUBLE RESET 7 8 9
SUPERVISORY

SILENCE R
SCROLL 0

Figure 1-6. Remote Display/Control Module

December 2004 1-6 P/N 06-236529-001


System Overview

1-3.2 ATM Series Driver Modules

The ATM Series Driver Modules permit third-party graphical annunciators and large numbers
of auxiliary relays to be used with the FENWALNET 6000. Two types of driver modules can be
used, Models ATM-L and ATM-R.
1-3.2.1 MODEL ATM-L ANNUNICATOR DRIVER MODULE
The Model ATM-L Annunciator Driver Module provides the FENWALNET 6000 with
up to 32 programmable, supervised LED outputs for graphical or tabular
annunciators, along with 6 system-level LED outputs and 5 system-level input circuits
for functional switches.
The system-level LEDs correspond to the following general conditions: Module Power,
Pre-Alarm, Alarm, Alarm Silence, Supervisory, and Trouble.
The input circuits for functional switches provide for the following operator
intervention: System Reset, Event Acknowledgement, Alarm Silence, Fire Drill, and
Lamp Test.
1-3.2.2 MODEL ATM-R RELAY DRIVER MODULE
The Model ATM-R Relay Driver Module can activate up to 32 programmable,
supervised relays.

The FENWALNET 6000 supports up to 16 ATM-L or ATM-R Driver Modules, or any


combination of these two modules, together with RDCMs, that does not exceed 31 total
addresses.

S2 S1 LK17

LK32
LK16 LK15
Out B
Out A
ATM-L/R 16
15 LK31 LK30
32
31
In B LK14 LK13 14 30
In A 13 LK29 LK28 29
12 28
W1 LK12 LK11 11 27
10 LK27 LK26 26

LK10 LK9 9 25
+24 V 8 LK25 LK24 24
Com 7 23
PS Flt LK8 LK7
6 22
Earth Gnd 5 LK23 LK22
21
LK6 LK5 4 20
3 LK21 LK20
19
A Trouble Lamp Test
2 18
B Sup. Com LK4 LK3 1 17
Sil. Out Ack LK19 LK18
Pre Alm Reset
Alarm Silence LK2 LK1
Pwr On Drill

Figure 1-7. ATM Series Driver Modules

P/N 06-236529-001 1-7 December 2004


System Overview

1-3.3 Trim Ring

A trim ring is available to semi-flush mount the control unit.

1-1/2 in.
All Around

14-9/16 in.

19-5/16 in.

Figure 1-8. Trim Ring

1-4 SMARTONE™ DETECTORS

The FENWALNET 6000 uses the SmartOne™ Series of intelligent smoke and heat detectors. These
detectors have their own data transceivers, micro-controllers, micro-controller memory, and
algorithms that allow the detectors to determine whether a normal, pre-alarm, alarm, or trouble
condition exists at their monitoring locations. Each detector continuously transmits its current status
to the FENWALNET 6000 through the signaling line circuit, and responds to control unit polling and
inquiries by the address that is set in the detector using the Handheld Programmer,
P/N 74-200013-001, or using the FENWALNET 6000’s display. The pre-alarm and alarm thresholds
are programmable for each detector.

A blinking LED on an intelligent detector indicates communications between the detector and
the control unit.

1-4.1 SmartOne Ionization Smoke Detector, Model CPD-7052

The Model CPD-7052 Ionization Smoke Detector is a low-profile, intelligent smoke detector
that uses an ionization sensing chamber. This detector can be utilized for open-area coverage
or can be mounted in a duct with air velocities up to 2,000 feet per minute.

Ionization detectors respond best to small smoke particles characteristic of flaming fires, and
are used primarily in areas where such fires are anticipated. They are also used in special
extinguishing systems as one criterion to release the extinguishing agent. See Figure 1-9.
Note: Older-style Model CPD-7040 Ionization Detectors may be used with the FENWALNET
6000 Control Unit.

Figure 1-9. SmartOne™ Smoke Detector

December 2004 1-8 P/N 06-236529-001


System Overview

1-4.2 SmartOne Photoelectric Smoke Detector, Model PSD-7152

The Model PSD-7152 Photoelectric Smoke Detector is a low-profile, intelligent smoke detector
that uses a light-scattering sensing chamber. This detector can be utilized for open-area
coverage or can be mounted in a duct with air velocities up to 4,000 feet per minute.

Photoelectric detectors respond best to large smoke particles characteristic of smoldering fires,
and are used primarily in areas where such fires are anticipated and in high-velocity underfloor
applications. They are also used in special extinguishing systems as one criterion to release the
extinguishing agent. See Figure 1-9.
Note: Older-style Model PSD-7140 Photoelectric Detectors may be used with the
FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit.

1-4.3 SmartOne Thermal Detector, Model THD-7252

The Model THD-7252 Thermal Detector is a low-profile, intelligent heat detector that uses a
thermistor sensing chamber for fast response. This detector can be used for open-area
coverage on low (< 10 ft.), flat ceilings with a spacing up to 70 ft. Smaller coverage is required
for high ceilings and ceilings with structural obstructions.

Figure 1-10. THD-7252 Thermal Detector

1-4.4 Detector Bases

Two detector bases are available.


1-4.4.1 FLANGED DETECTOR BASE, MODEL 6SB
The Model 6SB Detector Base is used in applications where the detector's installed
appearance is a primary consideration. This base mounts to standard 3-, 3½-, and
4-inch electrical boxes.

Figure 1-11. 6SB Detector Base (Flanged)

P/N 06-236529-001 1-9 December 2004


System Overview

1-4.4.2 FLANGELESS DETECTOR BASE, MODEL 4SB


The Model 4SB Detector Base is used in underfloor applications, or in applications
where the detector’s installed appearance is not a primary consideration. This base
mounts to standard 3- or 3½-inch electrical boxes.

Figure 1-12. 4SB Detector Base (Flangeless)

1-4.5 Detector Base Adapter, Model MA-002

The Model MA-002 Detector Base Adapter allows the low-profile SmartOne detectors to be
retrofitted into the older-style SmartOne detector base, P/N 70-400000-001.

Figure 1-13. MA-002 Detector Base Adapter

1-4.6 Duct Housing, Model DH-2000

The Model DH-2000 Duct Housing is used to enclose an intelligent smoke detector that is
monitoring for smoke in an air duct and is located outside of the duct. The duct housing is used
with inlet and outlet tubes that allow the air in the duct to be sampled uniformly and
transported to the enclosed smoke detector for obscuration-level measurement.
Note: Older-style DH-4000 Duct Housings with Model CPD-7040 Ionization Detectors or
Model PSD-7140 Photoelectric Detectors may be used with the FENWALNET 6000
Control Unit.

December 2004 1-10 P/N 06-236529-001


System Overview

DUCT
DETECTOR
MODEL
DH-2000
R

Figure 1-14. DH-2000 Duct-Detector Housing

1-5 SMARTONE ADDRESSABLE MODULES

SmartOne addressable modules are of three general types:


• Monitor Modules. These modules provide a uniquely-identifiable interface between the
FENWALNET 6000 and an initiating device.
• Relay Module. This module supplies an unpowered, Form-C contact at a point-specific address.
• Control Modules. These modules provide a uniquely-identifiable interface between the
FENWALNET 6000 and conventional notification appliances such as horns and strobes.

Each addressable module continuously transmits its current status to the FENWALNET 6000 Control
Unit via the signaling line circuit, and responds to control unit polling, inquiries, and activation
commands by the address that is set in the module using the Handheld Programmer,
P/N 74-200013-001, or using the FENWALNET 6000’s display.

1-5.1 Addressable Monitor Module, Model AI

The Model AI Addressable Monitor Module is used to monitor conventional, unpowered, contact-type
initiating devices through a Class-B, Style-B initiating device circuit. The AI, P/N 70-4070X8-001, is
used to monitor normally-open, contact-type initiating devices such as manual stations, waterflow
switches, and supervisory switches. The AI, P/N 70-4070X8-002, is used to monitor normally-closed,
contact-type initiating devices such as older-style supervisory switches.

The AI Modules are designed to be mounted in the electrical box of the device being monitored.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED
ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
SmartOne TM

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721
MODEL AI, N/O

INSTRUCTIONS
SEE INSTALLATION

06-235578-001

400 MAIN ST.

Figure 1-15. AI Monitor Module


Note: Older-style Monitor Modules, P/N 70-40700X-00X, may be used with the FENWALNET
6000 Control Unit.

P/N 06-236529-001 1-11 December 2004


System Overview

1-5.2 AnaLASER II Interface Module, Model AIM

The Model AIM AnaLASER II Interface Module is a monitor module that enables a High
Sensitivity Smoke Detector (HSSD) to report pre-alarm, alarm, and trouble signals to the
FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit via its signaling line circuit. The AIM mounts inside the
AnaLASER II detector housing.
Note: The AIM address cannot be set via the Handheld Programmer. Use either the LaserNET
Software or the FENWALNET 6000’s display to set the AIM’s address.

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
400 MAIN ST. ASHLAND, MA 01721
GND

ANALASER II INTERFACE MODULE RXTX


PART. NO. 89-300010-001 OUT

ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED


RXTX
IN

FM FENWALNETTM ADDRESS

APPROVED

Figure 1-16. AnaLASER II Interface Module

1-5.3 Addressable AlarmLine Module, Model AAM

The Model AAM Addressable AlarmLine Module is a monitor module that enables an
AlarmLine sensor cable to report pre-alarm and alarm or overheat events, and trouble signals
to the FENWALNET 6000 through the signaling line circuit. The AAM, P/N 73-100001-001, is
equipped with a metal cover plate for mounting to a 4” square electrical box.
P/N 73-100003-001, is a surface-mount, NEMA-4 enclosure for the AAM.

TM

Figure 1-17. Addressable AlarmLine Module

1-5.4 Addressable Relay Module, Model AO

The Model AO Addressable Relay Module provides an unpowered, Form-C contact for remote
control applications. The AO Module is designed to be mounted in the electrical box of the
device being controlled.

LED

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N/C (+) (-) (+) (-)
N/O COM
PC PC PC PC
TERMINALS 5-7 ARE POWER LIMITED
TERMINALS 1-4 ARE POWER LIMITED
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
TM

FOR SERVICE SEND TO:


KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-408004-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721
SmartOne

INSTRUCTIONS
SEE INSTALLATION

06-235577-001
MODEL AO

400 MAIN ST.

Figure 1-18. AO Relay Module


Note: Older-style Relay Modules, P/N 70-40800X-000, may be used with the FENWALNET
6000 Control Unit.

December 2004 1-12 P/N 06-236529-001


System Overview

1-5.5 Addressable Signal Modules, Models ASM and ASM-6SB

The Addressable Signal Modules permit notification appliances to be controlled by commands


issued via the FENWALNET 6000’s SLC. The ASM is supplied in two versions; Model ASM is
supplied with a thermoplastic mounting cover and Model ASM-6SB consists of an ASM
connected to a Model 6SB Detector Base. Both versions are designed to mount in a standard
4-11/16” electrical box, or a 4” square, extra-deep electrical box.
Note: Set the ASMs to the audio mode and install the end-of-line resistors across the trouble-
monitoring and output circuits before you address the ASMs with the Handheld
Programmer or the FENWALNET 6000’s display. Return the module to the Auxiliary
Mode before you use the ASM with the FENWALNET 6000.

AUXILIARY KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.


MODE ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.
P1=2&3 CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
S1=1&2 ON INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001
A B A B PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LIMITED
PC LINE ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED

TM
DEVICE
AUX./AUDIO MODE ADDRESS # _ _ _ _
SETTINGS
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM)
AUX. IN TROUBLE OUTPUT CKT.
+ - + - CKT. + - - + UL
R

AUDIO
MODE
P1=1&2 FM
S1=3 ON APPROVED

Figure 1-19. ASM Addressable Signal Module

1-6 ISOLATOR MODULES

Isolator modules are automatic switches that open a segment of the signaling line circuit when a short-
circuit fault is detected in that segment. The remainder of the signaling line circuit continues to
function normally and is unaffected by the short-circuit fault. The isolator modules will close and
resume normal operation when the short-circuit fault is removed.

Isolator module, P/N 74-200012-002, is supplied with a plastic cover plate for mounting to a single-
gang electrical box. Isolator module, P/N 74-200012-004, is designed to mount in the electrical box for
the Model 6SB detector base.

Underwriters
R Laboratories
LISTED

Figure 1-20. Isolator Modules

P/N 06-236529-001 1-13 December 2004


System Overview

1-7 SPECIFICATIONS

1-7.1 Electrical Specifications

The electrical specifications for the FENWALNET 6000 are as follows:


1-7.1.1 PRIMARY AC POWER
Primary AC connections are made through AC input-power terminals, TB 13, on the
FENWALNET 6000 main PCB. Wire size is #14 AWG minimum with 600 Vac
insulation.
• 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 3.2 A, or
• 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 1.6 A
Primary power is selected by the setting of slide switch on the side of the power supply
and by the setting of Switch S4 on the printed-circuit board. Refer to Paragraph 2-5 and
Paragraph 2-7.
Note: Physically disconnect the standby battery and remove primary AC power if the
power supply is accidentally short-circuited. Resume normal operations by
restoring the AC power and physically reconnecting the standby battery after
correcting the short-circuit fault.
1-7.1.2 BATTERY AND CHARGING CIRCUIT
Only use sealed, lead-acid batteries. Maximum battery charging circuit capacity is
70 AH. (Batteries larger than 12 AH require P/N 74-600000-014 (Blue) or P/N 74-
600000-514 (Red) or other UL Listed battery cabinet.) Refer to Appendix A, Table A-3,
for estimated standby times.
• Charging Circuit Voltage: 27.0 Vdc (nominal)
• Charging Circuit Current: 6.0 A (maximum)
1-7.1.3 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT
Connections between the control unit, the signaling line circuit, and the associated
SmartOne peripheral devices are supervised and power-limited.
• Wiring
– Class B, Style 4
– Class A, Style 6
– Class A, Style 7 (Note: Requires Isolator Modules.)
• Voltage: 24 Vdc nominal
• Maximum Resistance: 40 ohms
• Maximum Capacitance: 0.5 µF
• Maximum Current: 350 mA (short circuit)

1-7.2 Mechanical Specifications

The mechanical specifications for the FENWALNET 6000 are as follows:


• 14¼ in. wide x 19 in. high x 5 in. deep (enclosure only)
• 14¼ in. wide x 19-5/32 in. high x 5-1/16 in. deep

1-7.3 Environmental Specifications

The environmental specifications for the FENWALNET 6000 are as follows:


• Temperature: 32°F - 120°F
• Humidity: 93% at 90°F (non-condensing)

December 2004 1-14 P/N 06-236529-001


System Overview

1-7.4 Notification-Appliance and Releasing Circuits

All circuits are power-limited except where noted.

NAC Rating Regulated 24 Vdc


NAC Wiring Class A, Style Z
Class B, Style Y
Note: NACs suitable for synchronized and non-synchronized notification appliances.
Use polarized notification appliances only. The maximum number of synchronized devices is 25.
Max. Wiring Voltage Drop: 2 V (for NACs)
Varies (for Releasing Circuits)
Refer to Paragraph 2-9 through Paragraph 2-11
Operating Voltage: 24 Vdc (nominal)
Max. NAC Current: 1.5 A
Max. Rel. Ckt. Current: 2.4 A
Max. Current for all external devices: 5.0 A
Note: External devices include notification appliances, releasing solenoids, SLC initiating
and control devices, and all devices powered from the 24 Vdc Auxiliary-Power
Terminals (TB 2).
NAC End-of-Line Resistor: 10 K, 0.5 W
Releasing Circuits: Releasing circuits are not power-limited when
electro-explosive initiators are used or when In-
Line Device is not used for solenoid valves

Use In-Line Device, P/N 06-220023-001, to make


a single-solenoid or dual-solenoid releasing
circuit power-limited

1-7.5 Relays

The three programmable relays and the trouble relay can be used for either power-limited or
non-power-limited circuits. Contact ratings for these relays are:
• 1.0 A @ 30 Vdc (resistive)
• 0.5 A @ 30 Vdc (inductive)
• 0.5 A @ 120 Vac (inductive).

1-7.6 Auxiliary Outputs

The auxiliary outputs are power limited.


• Operating Voltage Range: 18.8 - 27.6 Vdc
• Maximum Current: 1.0A (each circuit)
• Maximum Current for all external devices: 5.0A
Note: External devices include notification appliances, releasing solenoids, SLC initiating and
control devices, and all devices powered from the 24 Vdc Auxiliary Power Terminals
(TB 2). All applicable compatible devices contained in this manual may be used.

P/N 06-236529-001 1-15 December 2004


System Overview

1-7.7 Electrical Supervision


• A short circuit from any field-wiring terminal (except AC-Power-Input Terminals and
Form-C Relay Terminals) to earth ground will create a “Ground-Fault” trouble condition.
• An open circuit in the wiring for the SLC, the outputs (NACs, release circuits, and
combination circuits), the RS-485 communications circuit, and the battery-charging
circuit will create an “Open” trouble condition.
• A short circuit between conductors in the wiring for the SLC, the outputs (NACs, release
circuits, and combination circuits), the RS-485 communications circuit, and the battery-
charging circuit will create a “Short” trouble condition.
Exception: Release circuits and combination circuits wired as non-power-limited.
• Impedance values for open-circuit and short-circuit conditions are:
– open circuit: infinite ohms
– short circuit: zero (0) ohms

December 2004 1-16 P/N 06-236529-001


Installation

CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION

This chapter is intended for system installers. It provides information necessary to successfully prepare for and
install the FENWALNET 6000 System. The FENWALNET 6000 Fire Alarm and Suppression System design is
based on the requirements of Fenwal Protection Systems, Underwriters Laboratories (UL), the Factory Mutual
System (FM), and codes and standards of the National Fire Protection Association. In all cases, the installation
must meet the requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Refer also to the Installer’s Wiring Diagram, P/N 06-236405-002, that is packaged with the FENWALNET 6000
Control Unit.

2-1 PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION

Complete the following preparation procedures before installing of the FENWALNET 6000 system.

2-1.1 Control-Unit Components

Check the contents of the FENWALNET 6000 shipping carton to ensure that you have received
the following components:
• Enclosure w/Door, P/N 06-220019-001(Blue) or P/N 06-220019-004 (Red)
• Power Supply, P/N 06-118394-001
• Circuit-Board Assembly with Display, P/N 74-600000-004
• Hardware Kit, P/N 06-220024-001
• Operating Instructions, P/N 06-236405-001
• Installation/Configuration Kit, P/N 74-600000-008, containing
– User Disk, P/N 06-220075-001, that includes
– Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual
– Configuration Program User’s Guide
– Configuration Program
– Installer’s Wiring Diagram, P/N 06-236405-002

2-1.2 Materials/Tools Required

The materials listed below are not supplied with the system, but are required for installation.
• No. 10 or 1/4” mounting bolts to mount the control unit cabinet
• Electrical conduit for AC input power and field circuits
• Electrical junction boxes (as required)
• Wire-nuts and crimp-on terminals (as required)
• Wrist ground strap

2-1.3 Determining Installation Location

Choose a location in an area that allows easy access for operation and maintenance of the
system. If a location has been designated by an architect and/or fire-prevention authority, plan
your installation according to that location. It is important that the location of the system be
clean, dry, vibration-free, and maintained within the operating limits.

P/N 06-236529-001 2-1 December 2004


Installation

2-2 CODES AND STANDARDS

Use the following codes, standards and practices when installing the FENWALNET 6000 System:
• NFPA 70, National Electric Code, Articles
– 250 Grounding
– 300 Wiring Methods
– 725 Remote Control, Signaling, and Power-Limited Circuits
– 760 Fire Protective Signaling Systems
– 800 Communications Circuits
• NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code
• NFPA 12, Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
• NFPA 12A, Standard on Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems
• NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
• NFPA 15, Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection
• NFPA 16, Standard for the Installation of Foam Water Sprinkler and Foam Water Spray Systems
• NFPA 17, Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
• NFPA 17A, Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems
• NFPA 2001, Standard for Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
• Local building codes
• Insurance requirements
• Requirements of local AHJ

December 2004 2-2 P/N 06-236529-001


Installation

2-3 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW

The following paragraphs provide an overview of installation steps once the system is unpacked and
site preparation is completed.

2-3.1 Step One: Installing the Control Unit Back Box and Preparing Electrical Wiring

The control unit back box can be either surface or semi-flush mounted. For full mounting and
installation procedures, see Paragraph 2-4.

In addition to back box mounting, the site must be prepared with appropriate electrical wiring
before system installation can begin.
• Removing knockouts.
Knockouts must be removed from the control-unit back box to enable the connection
between the conduit and the back box. Consult approved electrical installation drawings
for connection information.
• Installing conduit.
Route properly-sized conduit from the control-unit back box to locations designated on
the approved layout drawings for peripheral devices. Refer to the locations of the
automatic and manual initiating devices, notification appliances, remote display/control
modules, control heads for the extinguishing system, and addressable relay modules on
the system drawings.
• Electrical Boxes.
Install an electrical box at each designated location for peripheral devices such as
automatic and manual initiating devices, notification appliances, control heads for the
extinguishing system, and addressable relay modules. Refer to the installation
instructions included with the peripheral devices for the proper types of electrical boxes.
• Electrical wiring
Route the properly-sized and required wiring through conduit from the control unit to the
field devices. Observe the wiring manufacturer’s recommended minimum bending radii
for all internal-control-unit and external wiring. Use appropriate equipment to check and
record the wiring for insulation resistance to earth ground. Measure and record the
wiring resistance for all external circuits. Also measure and the record the SLC wiring
capacitance. Refer to the approved electrical installation drawings and to the
recommendations in this manual.
• Wiring Connections and SmartOne Devices.
Mount and make wiring connections to the peripheral devices as shown in their
installation instructions. Be sure that all SLC-based SmartOne devices have been
electronically addressed prior to installation.

2-3.2 Step Two: Installing the FENWALNET 6000 Power Supply and Main PCB
• Install the FENWALNET 6000 power supply and main printed-circuit board.
• Dress and connect field wiring to the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit's main
printed-circuit board as shown on the approved system drawings and as illustrated
in this manual.

2-3.3 Step Three: Connecting AC Power and Standby Battery

Apply AC power, then connect the standby battery.

2-3.4 Step Four: Auto-Configuring the System

Auto-configure the system as directed in Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.25, or run the AutoLearn


Procedure as shown in Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.24. Print out the list of SLC-based initiating
devices and addressable control and/or relay modules detected by these procedures and
compare this list to the approved set of SLC devices. Correct any inconsistencies and/or
trouble messages.

P/N 06-236529-001 2-3 December 2004


Installation

2-3.5 Step Five: Uploading the Application Program and Performing the Pre-Test

Upload the site-specific application program, and pre-test the system in accordance with the
approved sequence of operation. Be sure that extinguishing-system actuation devices are not
connected to the extinguishing system during pre-testing.

2-3.6 Step Six: Performing Final System Test and Commissioning the System

Final test and commission the system in the presence of the owner and the authority having
jurisdiction. Be sure that extinguishing-system actuation devices are not connected to the
extinguishing system during final testing.

2-3.7 Step Seven: Installing the Actuation Devices and Extinguishing System

Connect the actuation devices to the extinguishing system per the procedures in the applicable
agent-storage-container installation manual.

2-3.8 Step Eight: Performing Final Installation Procedures

Install the front door when testing is completed, all appropriate occupancy certificates have
been secured, the end user has been thoroughly trained in the system operation, and the
system is armed and ready for service. Lock the front door and give the key to the end user's
designated personnel.

2-4 MOUNTING THE CABINET/ENCLOSURE

The control unit can be surface or semi-flush mounted. Figure 2-1 shows the control-unit-enclosure
dimensions. All dimensions are in inches.

14.25
13.12
9.12
5.12
1.12
1.500 1/2" (0.875 Dia) 3/4" (1.125 Dia)
Combination Knockouts
(4) Located on Top
(3) Located In-Line on Two Sides

0.500
Top View Cover Outside

1.000
12.250 5.000
2.25
1.000
2.00

5.00

8.00

19.456
16.500

19.00
17.000

0.281 Dia. Holes


Typ (2) Places

Side View

7.12

1/2" (0.875 Dia) 3/4" (1.125 Dia)


Combination Knockout

1.500

Bottom View

Note: All dimensions are in inches.

Figure 2-1. Enclosure Dimensions

December 2004 2-4 P/N 06-236529-001


Installation

2-4.1 Preparing the Enclosure for Wall Mounting

For either mounting configuration:


1. Remove the keys from the envelope taped to the top of the enclosure and open the door
to the control unit.
2. Disconnect the ground wire that connects the enclosure door to the back box.
3. Remove the control unit front door first by unlocking it and rotating the door
approximately 90° from its closed position.
4. Lift up the door to allow the door’s hinge pins to clear the mating-hinge sockets on the
back box.
5. Remove the separately packaged power supply, printed-circuit board, and plastic bag
(i.e., ship kit) containing installation hardware, and set them and the front door aside in
a safe location to prevent damage.
6. Locate the top of the cabinet approximately 66” above the floor so that the control unit’s
display is positioned at a convenient height for viewing system events and for entering
operator commands.

2-4.2 Surface Mounting

To surface mount the control unit:


1. Mark and pre-drill holes for four mounting bolts using the dimensions shown in
Figure 2-2. The installer must supply the mounting bolts (up to size 1/4-20). There are
two holes and two keyhole slots in the enclosure’s rear panel that serve as a template for
surface mounting.

1.000
12.250

1.000

19.456
16.500

17.000

0.281 Diameter
Holes Typ (2) Places

Figure 2-2. Back Box Mounting Dimensions


2. Insert the upper two fasteners in the wall. Leave approximately 1/4” protruding
for both screws.
3. Slip upper keyholes of the back box over the two protruding screws. Tighten the screws.
4. Insert and tighten the two lower screws.
5. Attach wiring conduit to the enclosure via the enclosure knockouts, and pull the required
number of wires through the conduit to the enclosure. Leave approximately 2 to 3 feet of
wire length in the enclosure for future internal connections.

P/N 06-236529-001 2-5 December 2004


Installation

2-4.3 Semi-Flush Mounting

To semi-flush mount the control unit:


1. Cut and plumb an opening approximately 14.25” wide by 19” high in the wall on which
the control unit will be semi-flush mounted.

14.25

0.500 Cover
Outside
14.25 5.000

Wall Cutout
19.00 19.00

Figure 2-3. Semi-Flush Mounting Dimensions


2. Position and plumb the back box in the opening made in Step 1. Ensure that the front
edge of the back box is at least 3/4 inches from the surface of the wall. Refer to Figure 2-3.
Secure the back box to the wall with appropriate mounting bolts (up to size 1/4-20).
3. Attach wiring conduit to the enclosure through the enclosure knockouts, and pull the
required number of wires through the conduit to the enclosure. Leave approximately 2 to
3 feet of wire length in the enclosure for future internal connections.

December 2004 2-6 P/N 06-236529-001


Installation

2-5 INSTALLING THE POWER SUPPLY

Use a ground strap to prevent static discharge that could damage the power supply.
CAUTION

Note: Make sure the control unit location is dry and that the enclosure is free of construction dust
and metal shavings prior to installing the power supply.
1. Remove the power supply unit from its shipping carton.
2. Connect the wire harness that is packaged in the installation kit. Next connect the fork end of the
green ground wire that is also part of the installation kit to the earth-ground terminal of the power
supply. Refer to Figure 2-4 for wire harness and earth-ground connections.

Option "A"

Wiring-Harness
Connections
Fastening Tab
NEUTRAL

for Screw
+ 24 V
- 24 V
LINE

GND
WHT

WHT/BLK BLK RED

Retention Tabs
Ground Wire from Installation Kit Typ (2)
Connect to lower earth-ground stud on left-
hand side of enclosure.

Or

Threaded hole for


3 x 10 mm mounting screw.

Wiring-Harness
Connections
Option "B"
NEUTRAL
GND
LINE

- V
- V
+V
+V
WHT

WHT/BLK BLK RED


Important!
Two equivalent versions of the power-supply
unit are in use with minor differences in wiring
Ground Wire from Installation Kit connections. Check the labeling on the power-
Connect to lower earth-ground stud on left-
hand side of enclosure. supply unit and connect the wiring harness as
shown in Option "A" or Option "B".

Figure 2-4. Power Supply Unit


3. Locate the 3 x 10 mm mounting screw in the installation kit and thread it part way into the lower
of the two threaded holes of the power supply unit. See Figure 2-4.
4. Ensure that the power supply unit AC-input-voltage selector switch is set to the proper position
for either 120 Vac or 220/240 Vac. See Figure 2-5.

P/N 06-236529-001 2-7 December 2004


Installation

230 V
115 V

Figure 2-5. Primary Power Selection Switch


5. Locate the two power-supply-unit retention tabs and the fastening tab in the enclosure’s
back panel.
6. Position the power-supply unit with the wire harness down, and then slide it onto the retention tabs.
The 3 x 10 mm mounting screw should slide into the slot of the fastening tab at the same time.
7. Tighten the screw onto the fastening tab.
8. Connect the ring end of the power supply’s green ground wire to the lower earth-ground stud on
the left side of the enclosure.

2-6 INSTALLING THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (PCB)

Use a ground strap to prevent static discharge that could damage sensitive components
CAUTION on the main PCB.

Refer to Figure 2-6 before you unpack and install the PCB within the enclosure.
Note: Make sure the control unit location is dry and that the enclosure is free of construction dust
and metal shavings prior to installing the PCB.

AC Protective Cover
(with standoff)

Figure 2-6. PCB Installation

December 2004 2-8 P/N 06-236529-001


Installation

1. Locate the nine (9) 2-1/4 in. aluminum standoffs in the installation kit and screw one securely
into each of the nine (9) threaded PEMs in the back surface of the enclosure.
2. Slip on a wrist ground strap and clip the ground strap to the earth ground in the enclosure. Do
not remove the PCB from its shipping carton unless you have established a common earth-
ground potential among yourself, the enclosure, and the PCB’s shipping carton.
3. Remove the PCB from its shipping carton and position each of its nine (9) mounting holes over
one of the aluminum standoffs so that the AC-input terminal block is in the lower-left corner.
4. Secure the PCB to the standoffs using the eight (8) short washer-and-screw assemblies supplied
in the installation kit.
Note: Do not tighten the screws at this time.
The PCB mounting hole in the lower left corner utilizes a longer nylon screw that also holds the
AC Safety Cover in place. See Section 2-7.1.
5. Refer to Figure 2-7 and place the free end of the longer of the two factory-installed Earth-Ground
wires under the screw assembly of the main printed-circuit board as shown before tightening.
Tighten the remaining eight screws. Be careful not to over-tighten.
6. Plug the harness from the power-supply unit into Connector J12 in the lower-left-hand corner of
the PCB.

TB1 TB15
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

J3 J5 RS-232 A
SLC RS 485
USB B
RS-232 B J8

NO NC C
Relay 1

Attach shorter ground TB4


System Status
NO NC C
Relay 2 Relay 3 Trouble

TB8

wire to enclosure POWER ON 1 2 3


NO NC C

TM ACKNOWLEDGE
TB9

door with washer-


ALARM
SILENCE 4 5 6
PRE-ALARM
NO NC C

TB10

TROUBLE

and-screw assembly.
RESET 7 8 9

J10 SUPERVISORY
SCROLL
Style 4

SILENCE 0
S2

1 2 3 4
NAC 2
TB3
- -

TB14
+
Attach longer ground wire

1 2 3 4
+

NAC 1
to PCB with washer-and-
Batt Out

TB5

screw assembly.
PSU
J12

240
N
AC IN

Release 1 Release 2 Aux 24 VDC Combo 1 Combo 2


L

120 TB11 TB2 TB7 TB6


TB13 TB12 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Earth-ground terminal for


power supply and green
wire of AC supply

Figure 2-7. PCB-to-Cabinet Grounding Diagram

P/N 06-236529-001 2-9 December 2004


Installation

2-7 AC AND DC POWER CONNECTIONS

The control unit uses commercially- or end-user-provided AC power as the primary power source,
together with a 24 Vdc standby battery (when required by local codes and/or Authority Having
Jurisdiction [AHJ] requirements).

Two different sources of power can be connected to the control unit. Disconnect both
sources of power and critical components such as control heads for special extinguishing
systems and addressable pilot relays controlling facility-power shutoff before servicing
WARNING the control unit. The control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by
connecting wiring while the control unit is energized.

Use caution when connecting power. High-voltage and AC-powered circuits are present in
the control unit. Be sure to adequately ground the control unit to reduce the risk of
WARNING electrical shock.

2-7.1 AC Power Connection

The primary AC power for the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit is 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 3.2 A or
220/240 Vac, 50/60Hz, 1.6A. The default power configuration is 120 Vac and will require
resetting for 220/240 Vac operation. Configuration of primary AC power requires that the
power-selection switch on the side of the power supply be set correctly before the power supply
is installed in the enclosure, and that Switch S4 in the lower-left corner of the printed-circuit
board be set to agree with the primary AC power being used. Refer to Paragraph 2-5.

Over-current protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical
Code (NEC) and/or the local electrical code. Use a grounded power cord of #14 AWG or larger
wire with 600 Vac rating to make the AC power connection to the control unit. Follow the
procedure below to make AC power connections.
1. Disconnect all power sources from the control unit and the AC power cord
2. Run AC-input wiring to the left side of the enclosure, and preferably, use the lowest of the
three knock-outs on the left-hand side as the entry point for primary power.
3. Connect the primary power earth-ground (green) wire to the lower Earth Ground stud on
the left inside of the enclosure.
4. Connect the neutral (white) wire to the Main Circuit Board Terminal Block TB13
labeled ‘N’ (Neutral).
5. Connect the hot (black) wire to the Main Circuit Board Terminal Block TB13 labeled
‘L’ (Line).
6. Remove the AC Safety Cover, 3/4” nylon spacer, and 1-1/8” nylon screw from the
installation kit. Fold the cover along its scored lines and install it over the AC power input
terminals, as shown in Figure 2-8.

December 2004 2-10 P/N 06-236529-001


Installation

Figure 2-8. Primary-Power Connections


7. Set AC-Power-Selection Switch S4 on the main printed-circuit board to correspond to the
AC input power (120 Vac, 50/60 Hz, or 220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz) being used.

2-7.2 DC Power Connection

Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes and can
damage clothing. Immediately flush areas of the skin or eyes that have been contacted
WARNING with sulfuric acid for 15 minutes with water and seek medical attention promptly.

Note: Observe polarity when connecting the battery to the control unit.

To connect the standby battery to the control unit:


1. Calculate the size of the battery required for the application. Refer to Appendix A for the
proper procedure.
2. Connect two 12-volt, series-wired batteries of the required ampere-hour (AH) capacity to
printed-circuit board Terminals TB3 using the battery cable. See Figure 2-9.

P/N 06-236529-001 2-11 December 2004


Installation

Battery Jumper

- -
+ TB3
+

- + - +
12-V Battery 12-V Battery
Battery Cables

Single-Battery Installation

Battery Jumper
Typical (by installer)

- -
+ TB3
+

- + - +
12-V Battery 12-V Battery

Battery Cables
Typical (by installer)

- + - + Note:
Locate all batteries in a common
battery cabinet or in close-coupled
12-V Battery 12-V Battery battery cabinets with all battery
cables in conduit.

Dual-Battery Installation

Figure 2-9. Standby Battery Connections

2-8 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT

The signaling line circuit (SLC) is the communications path between the FENWALNET 6000 Control
Unit and the SmartOne field devices. The SLC can be wired to meet NFPA 72 Class-A, Style-6 and -7
or Class-B, Style-4 requirements.

The SLC can accommodate any combination of up to 255 devices, which include SmartOne automatic
initiating devices, monitor modules, relay modules, and control modules.

2-8.1 SLC Wiring Requirements

All SLC wiring must be twisted, unshielded, low-capacitance, fire-alarm-system wire. Refer to
Appendix A for recommended wire types.
2-8.1.1 CLASS-B, STYLE-4 WIRING REQUIREMENTS
The total wiring resistance from the control unit to the end of each individual branch
line cannot exceed 40 ohms. Use the following procedure to determine the wiring
resistance.
1. Short the ends of each branch line one at a time. Measure the resistance from the
terminating points at the control unit to the end of the branch line. See
Figure 2-10.
2. Remove the shorting jumper after each branch-line resistance measurement.

December 2004 2-12 P/N 06-236529-001


Installation

Jumper

Branch 1

Branch 2

Branch N

Volt-Ohm Meter

Branch 3

Figure 2-10. Measuring Class-B SLC Wiring Resistance


The total wiring capacitance cannot exceed 0.5 µF. Use the following procedure to
determine the wiring capacitance.
1. Ensure that the ends of each branch line are open circuited.
2. Measure the capacitance from the terminating points at the control unit using a
capacitance meter. See Figure 2-11.

Branch 1

Branch 2

Branch N

Capacitance Meter

Branch 3

Figure 2-11. Measuring Class-B SLC Wiring Capacitance


Figure 2-12 shows typical wiring for a Class-B, Style-4 signaling line circuit. Make sure
that the SLC-Selector Switch S2 is moved to the left into the Style-4 position. Refer to
Figure 1-3.

P/N 06-236529-001 2-13 December 2004


To Next Device To Next Device
AO Relay Module AAM AlarmLine Module
Installation

December 2004
7

N/O
6

COM
5
N/C
To Next Device

4
3
PC LINE

2
OUT IN

PC PC PC PC
(+) (-) (+) (-)
WHT

BLU
RED
ORN
ABAB

ASM Signal Module


AI Monitor Module

8
AIM Monitor Module

7
6
R

A B (+) (-)
5
4
GND

3
RXTX
OUT

2
RXTX

PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED
(+) (-) (+) (-)
IN
FM FENWALNET ADDRESS

APPROVED

Detector Base Detector Base


of isolator modules.

2-14
OUT IN
7 Isolator Module 7
RET 24 V RET 24 V
(Single-Gang Mount)
3 3

Caution:

OUT IN Do not use looped wire under terminals of OUT IN

RET 24 V RET 24 V
detector bases. Break SLC wire run to provide RET 24 V RET 24 V

Figure 2-12. Class-B, Style-4 Signaling Line Circuit


supervision of connections.
Isolator Module Isolator Module
(Single-Gang Mount) (Single-Gang Mount)
Branch 2

Branch 1 Branch N

Notes:
SLC Terminals on
1. Move SLC-Style Switch S2 to the left into the Style-4 position. Printed-Circuit Board
2. Each isolator module creates a 0.12-V voltage drop. 4 3 2 1 (TB1)
circuit. A maximum of 30 SmartOne devices can be installed between a pair
Note: Isolator modules are not required for a Class-B, Style-4 signaling line

P/N 06-236529-001
Installation

2-8.1.2 CLASS-A, STYLE-6 WIRING REQUIREMENTS


Note: The following resistance reading MUST be taken PRIOR to the installation of
any peripheral device.
The total wiring resistance from the start of the “Out” leg to the end of the “Return” leg
cannot exceed 40 ohms. Use the following procedure to determine the
wiring resistance.
1. Short the “Out” and “Return” legs as shown in Figure 2-13. Measure the
resistance using the other two terminating points at the control unit
2. Remove the shorting jumper after the resistance measurement.

Jumper

Return Leg

Out Leg

Volt-Ohm Meter

Figure 2-13. Measuring Class-A SLC Wiring Resistance


The total wiring capacitance cannot exceed 0.5 µF. Use the following procedure to
determine the wiring capacitance.
Note: The following capacitance reading MUST be taken PRIOR to the installation of
any peripheral device.
1. Measure the capacitance using the wiring that will connect to control unit
terminals TB1-1 and TB1-3 (Terminals TB1-2 and TB1-4 MUST remain
disconnected from the control unit) as shown in Figure 2-14.

Return Leg

Out Leg

Capacitance Meter

Figure 2-14. Measuring Class-A SLC Wiring Capacitance


Figure 2-15 shows typical wiring for a Class-A, Style-6 signaling line circuit. Make sure
that the SLC-Selector Switch S2 is moved to the right into the Style-6 position. Refer to
Figure 1-3
Note: Isolator modules are not required for a Class-A, Style-6 signaling line circuit. A
maximum of 30 SmartOne devices can be installed between a pair of
isolator modules.

P/N 06-236529-001 2-15 December 2004


AO Relay Module AAM AlarmLine Module
Installation

N/O

December 2004
6

COM
5
N/C
4
3
PC LINE

2
OUT IN

PC PC PC PC
(+) (-) (+) (-)
WHT

BLU
RED
ORN
ABAB

ASM Signal Module


AI Monitor Module

8
AIM Monitor Module

7
6
R

A B (+) (-)
5
4
GND

3
RXTX
OUT

2
RXTX

PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED
(+) (-) (+) (-)
IN
FM FENWALNET ADDRESS

APPROVED

Detector Base Detector Base

OUT IN
7 Isolator Module 7

2-16
RET 24 V RET 24 V
(Single-Gang Mount)
3 3

Caution:
OUT IN OUT IN

RET 24 V RET 24 V RET 24 V RET 24 V


Do not use looped wire under terminals of
detector bases. Break SLC wire run to provide

Figure 2-15. Class-A, Style-6 Signaling Line Circuit


Isolator Module Isolator Module
(Single-Gang Mount) supervision of connections. (Single-Gang Mount)

Notes:

1. Move SLC-Style Switch S2 to the right into the Style-6 position. SLC Terminals on
2. Each isolator module creates a 0.12-V voltage drop. Printed-Circuit Board
4 3 2 1 (TB1)

P/N 06-236529-001
P/N 06-236529-001
AI Monitor Module
2-8.1.3

AO Relay Module
OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN

8
7
RET 24 V RET 24 V RET 24 V RET 24 V

N/O
RET 24 V RET 24 V

7
6

COM

6
5
N/C

A B (+) (-)
5
4

4
3

3
2

2
1

PC PC PC PC

1
(+) (-) (+) (-)

PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED
(+) (-) (+) (-)
OUT IN
OUT IN
RET 24 V RET 24 V
RET 24 V RET 24 V

Caution:

Do not use looped wire under terminals of


detector bases. Break SLC wire run to provide
supervision of connections
.

2-17
OUT IN

RET 24 V RET 24 V
7
Detector Base
3

ASM Signal Module


SPECIAL CLASS-A, STYLE-7 REQUIREMENTS

OUT IN Single-Gang-Mount
Isolator Module
RET 24 V RET 24 V
(Typical) OUT IN

Figure 2-16. Class-A, Style-7 Signaling Line Circuit


See Note 2
RET 24 V RET 24 V
is moved to the right into the Style-6 position. Refer to Figure 1-3.

Notes:

1. All wiring shall be installed in conduit. SLC Terminals on


2. Install isolator modules as close as possible to protected devices (max. 20 feet). Printed-Circuit Board
3. Move the SLC-Style Switch S2 to the right into the Style-6 position. 4 3 2 1 (TB1)
4. Each isolator module creates a 0.12-V voltage drop.
A Class-A, Style-7 signaling line circuit requires a pair of isolator modules for each
SmartOne device as shown in Figure 2-16. Make sure that the SLC-Selector Switch S2
Installation

December 2004
Installation

2-9 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS

The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit has two notification-appliance circuits (NACs) that are labeled
NAC1 and NAC2. These circuits have field-wiring connections that terminate at TB5 and TB14,
respectively. Each NAC can supply up to 1.5 A of current at a nominal 24 Vdc for polarized notification
appliances. Total current output of the FENWALNET 6000 power supply must not exceed 5.4 A.

Both circuits are supervised, power limited, and are compatible with conventional, UL-Listed, 24-Vdc
notification appliances. They can also be used with the following Fenwal synchronizable horns
and strobes:
• MT Series Multi-Tone Horns and Horn/Strobes
• NS Series Horn/Strobes
• NH Series Horns
• RSS(P) Series Strobes

The MT and NS Series notification appliances provide the option to use silenceable horns and non-
silenceable strobes on the same NAC. Refer to the FENWALNET 6000 Programmer’s Guide to
configure one or both NACs for use with the Fenwal MT and NS Series notification appliances.

Figure 2-17 shows typical wiring for a Class-A, Style-Z notification appliance circuit.

Supervised and Power-Limited


4
NAC 1

NAC 2

3
or

End-of-Line Resistor
10k +/- 10%, 0.5W - -
2
1

+ +

TB5
or
TB14 Polarized Notification Appliance
(Typical)

Figure 2-17. Class-A, Style-Z Notification-Appliance Circuit

Figure 2-18 shows typical wiring for a Class-B, Style-Y notification appliance circuit.

Supervised and Power-Limited


4
NAC 1

NAC 2
3
or

- - End-of-Line Resistor
2

10 k +/- 10%, 0.5 W


1

+ +
TB5
or
TB14 Polarized Notification Appliance
(Typical)

Figure 2-18. Class-B, Style-Y Notification-Appliance Circuit

December 2004 2-18 P/N 06-236529-001


Installation

Use Figure 2-19 to estimate the maximum length of wire as a function of notification-appliance current
for both NACs.

12000
11500
11000
10500
10000
9500
9000
Maximum NAC Wire Length (Ft.)

8500
8000
7500
7000
6500
6000
5500
5000
4500
4000
#1
3500 2A
W
3000 G
#1
2500 4A
#1 W
2000 G
6A
1500 WG
#18
1000 AW
G
500
0
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
NAC Current (A)

Figure 2-19. Wiring Length vs. Notification-Appliance Current

2-10 COMBINATION CIRCUITS

The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit has two combination circuits that can be used either as
notification-appliance circuits (NACs) or as releasing circuits for solenoid valves. The combination
circuits are labeled Combo1 and Combo2. These circuits have field-wiring connections that terminate
at TB7 and TB6, respectively.

2-10.1 Combination Circuits used as NACs

Each combination circuit can supply up to 1.5 A of current at a nominal 24 Vdc for polarized
notification appliances when configured as a NAC. Total current output of the FENWALNET
6000 power supply must not exceed 5.4 A.

Both combination circuits are supervised and power limited when configured as NACs. They
are compatible with conventional, UL-Listed, 24-Vdc notification appliances. They can also be
used with the following Fenwal synchronizable horns and strobes:
• MT Series Multi-Tone Horns and Horn/Strobes
• NS Series Horn/Strobes
• NH Series Horns
• RSS(P) Series Strobes

The MT and NS Series notification appliances provide the option to use silenceable horns and
non-silenceable strobes on the same NAC. Refer to the FENWALNET 6000 Programmer’s
Guide to configure one or both combination circuits as NACs and to configure them for use with
the Fenwal MT and NS Series notification appliances.

P/N 06-236529-001 2-19 December 2004


Installation

Figure 2-20 shows typical wiring for a combination circuit wired as a Class-A, Style-Z
notification appliance circuit.

Combo 1 or
Combo 2
1 2 3 4
TB7 or
TB6
End-of-Line Resistor
10k +/- 10%, 0.5W
Supervised and Power-Limited

- -
+ +

Polarized Notification Appliance


(Typical)

Figure 2-20. Combination Circuit used as Class-A, Style-Z NAC

Figure 2-21 shows typical wiring for a combination circuit wired as a Class-B, Style-Y
notification appliance circuit.

Combo 1 or
Combo 2
1 2 3 4
TB7 or
TB6
Supervised and Power-Limited

- - End-of-Line Resistor
10 k +/- 10%, 0.5 W
+ +

Polarized Notification Appliance


(Typical)

Figure 2-21. Combination Circuit used as Class-B, Style-Y NAC

Use Figure 2-19 to estimate the maximum length of wire as a function of notification-appliance
current for a combination circuit used as a NAC.

2-10.2 Combination Circuits used as Releasing Circuits

Each combination circuit can be configured as a releasing circuit to activate either one Fenwal
control head or one pre-action-sprinkler or deluge-sprinkler valve. Total current output of the
FENWALNET 6000 power supply must not exceed 5.4 A.

Both combination circuits are supervised and power limited when configured as releasing
circuits and when the in-line device, P/N 06-220023-001, is wired in series with the solenoid
valve. The compatible control heads and solenoid valves are listed in Appendix A. Refer to the
FENWALNET 6000 Programmer’s Guide to configure one or both combination circuits as
releasing circuits.

Route non-power limited wiring at least 1/4 inch away from all power-limited wiring.

Ensure that all releasing devices are physically disconnected from the releasing circuits
WARNING before performing any system testing or maintenance.

December 2004 2-20 P/N 06-236529-001


Installation

Figure 2-22 shows a combination circuit wired for releasing. Refer to Appendix A for further
information.

Combo 1 or
Combo 2
1 2 3 4
TB7 or
TB6

Supervised and Power-Limited

Solenoid
Red Blk (Refer to Appendix C)

In-Line Releasing Device (P/N 06-220023-001)


(Must be close nippled to solenoid enclosure)

Figure 2-22. Combination Circuit used as Releasing Circuit

2-11 RELEASING CIRCUITS

The FENWALNET 6000 has two releasing circuits that can be configured to actuate extinguishing
systems through any of the following ways:
• Series-wired initiator assemblies
• Single control head or solenoid valve
• Two series-supervised, parallel-actuated control heads or solenoid valves.

The release circuits are labeled Release1 and Release2 and have field-wiring connections that
terminate at TB12 and TB11, respectively.

Ensure that all releasing devices are physically disconnected from the releasing circuits
WARNING before performing any system testing or maintenance.

2-11.1 Releasing Circuits for Series-Wired Initiator Assemblies

Initiator assemblies are Class-C explosives. Always use safety glasses or a face shield when
handling them. Do not remove the shorting cap from the initiator assembly until the
assembly is installed in the agent-storage container. Physical abuse or static-electricity
WARNING discharge could cause inadvertent initiator actuation and personnel injury. The installer
must establish a common electrical potential with the initiator assembly and the agent-
storage container before either removing or inserting the shorting cap.

Figure 2-23 shows series-wired initiators connected to a releasing circuit. Each releasing
circuit is capable of either one of the following two arrangements:
• A maximum of 12 P/N 31-199932-004 initiators, connected in series, with a total-circuit
resistance of 10 ohms +/- 1 ohm.
• A maximum of 6 P/N 93-191001-001 initiators, connected in series, with a total-circuit
resistance of 10 ohms+/- 1 ohm.

These two types of initiators must not be mixed together on the same release circuit. A releasing
circuit is supervised and non-power-limited when used with series-wired initiators. Refer to the
FENWALNET 6000 Programmer’s Guide to configure one or both releasing circuits to actuate
series-wired initiator assemblies.

P/N 06-236529-001 2-21 December 2004


Installation

Route non-power-limited wiring at least 1/4 inch away from all power-limited wiring.

Do not measure the total resistance of the initiator circuit with any instrument other than
a blasting galvanometer or similar device with a maximum current output of 50 mA. Do
WARNING not use a megohmeter with a current output greater than 50 mA to check the initiator-
circuit wiring for low impedance paths to earth ground.

Note: Choose compensating resistor so that total initiator-circuit resistance is 10 ohms


+/- 1 ohm. Use resistor rated for 1/2 watt.

Release 1 or
Release 2 Compensating Resistor
TB12 or 1 2 3 4
TB11

Supervised and
Non-Power-Limited
Initiator Assemblies
(P/N 31-199932-004 or
P/N 93-191001-001)

Figure 2-23. Releasing-Circuit Wiring for Initiators

2-11.2 Releasing Circuits for Single Control Head or Solenoid Valve

Each releasing circuit can be configured to activate either one Fenwal control head or one pre-
action-sprinkler or deluge-sprinkler valve. Total current output of the FENWALNET 6000
power supply must not exceed 5.4 A. Figure 2-24 shows a releasing circuit wired for single-
control-head or single-solenoid-valve actuation.

Release 1 or
Release 2
1 2 3 4
TB12 or
TB11

Supervised and Power-Limited

Solenoid
Red (Refer to Appendix C)
Blk

In-Line Releasing Device (P/N 06-220023-001)


(Must be close nippled to solenoid enclosure)

Figure 2-24. Releasing-Circuit Wiring for Single Solenoid

A releasing circuit is supervised and power limited when the in-line device, P/N 06-220023-001,
is wired in series with the single control head or solenoid valve. See Appendix A for compatible
control heads and solenoid valves. Refer to the FENWALNET 6000 Programmer’s Guide to
configure the releasing circuits for single-control-head or single-solenoid-valve actuation.

Route non-power-limited wiring at least 1/4 inch away from all power-limited wiring.

December 2004 2-22 P/N 06-236529-001


Installation

2-11.3 Releasing Circuits for Dual Control Heads or Solenoid Valves

Each releasing circuit can be configured to activate either dual Fenwal control heads or
dual pre-action-sprinkler or deluge-sprinkler valves that do not exceed the maximum
release circuit current of 2.4A. It can also activate combinations of Fenwal control heads
and/or pre-action/deluge sprinkler valves that do not exceed the maximum release circuit
current of 2.4A. Total current output of the FENWALNET 6000 power supply must not
exceed 5.4 A. Figure 2-25 shows a releasing circuit wired for dual-control-head or dual-
solenoid-valve actuation.
Note: Total combined control head and/or solenoid current must not exceed 2.4A
(continuous output).

Release 1 or
Release 2
1 2 3 4

TB12 or
TB11

Supervised and Power-Limited

Solenoid
(Refer to Appendix C)
Red Blk

Solenoid
Red Blk (Refer to Appendix C)

In-Line Releasing Device (P/N 06-220023-001)


(Typ 2)
(Must be close nippled to solenoid enclosure)

Figure 2-25. Releasing-Circuit Wiring for Dual Solenoids

A releasing circuit is supervised and power limited when the in-line device, P/N 06-220023-001,
is wired in series with each of the two control heads or solenoid valves. See Appendix A for
compatible control heads and solenoid valves. Refer to the FENWALNET 6000 Programmer’s
Guide to configure the releasing circuits for dual-control-head or dual-solenoid-valve actuation.

Route non-power-limited wiring at least 1/4 inch away from all power-limited wiring. Do not
attach power-limited and non-power-limited wiring to the same terminal block.

2-12 AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUTS

Figure 2-26 shows the auxiliary-power terminals on the main printed-circuit board. Both outputs are
configurable for either resettable or non-resettable operation. Refer to the FENWALNET 6000
Programmer’s Guide to configure the auxiliary-power outputs.

Both auxiliary-power outputs are power-limited.


Note: Each output 1.0 A (max.) @ 24 Vdc (nominal)

P/N 06-236529-001 2-23 December 2004


Installation

TB2
1 2 3 4

- + Output No. 1
Output No. 2 + -

Figure 2-26. Auxiliary-Power Terminals

2-13 RS-485 COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUIT

The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit can communicate with up to 31 peripheral devices via its RS-485
communications circuit. The peripheral devices are listed below, along with the maximum numbers
for each particular type of device. The total number of peripheral devices cannot exceed 31.

Table 2-1. FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit Maximum Peripheral Devices

Device Maximum Number

Model RDCM Remote Display Control Module 15


Model ATM-L Annunciator Driver Module 16
Model ATM-R Relay Driver Module 16

The RS-485 communications circuit is power-limited. Figure 2-27 shows typical interconnections among the
FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit and the peripheral devices using a single communications channel.

December 2004 2-24 P/N 06-236529-001


P/N 06-236529-001
Maximum Length: 4,000 Ft. W1
SW1
Install Jumper VR2
(Twisted, Shielded, Low-Capacitance Wire) VR1

RDCM Circuit Board


1 TB1
2
3 JK2
4
5
6
7 JK1
8

W2
SW2
Remove W2 DS1

Connect wires for shields together at each


Connect wire for shield to earth-ground intermediate remote annunciator. Do not connect
screw in upper-edge of PCB. wires for shields to the earth-ground screw in
remote enclosures.

TB1 TB15
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

J3 J5 RS-232 A Leave shield wire floating at last remote annunciator. Do not


J6 J3
SLC RS 485 USB A
USB B connect wire for shield to the earth-ground screw in last
RS-232 B J8
remote enclosure. Trim shield wire as much as possible.
SLC

S2 S1 LK17

Relay 1
LK32
LK16 LK15

2-25
NO NC C NO NC C
Out B 16 32
POWER ON TM 1 2 3
LK31 LK30
ACKNOWLEDGE Out A ATM-L 15 31
ALARM In B LK14 LK13 14 30

NO NC C
SILENCE 4 5 6 In A 13
PRE-ALARM LK29 LK28 29
12 28
TROUBLE RESET 7 8 9
W1 LK12 LK11 11 27

NO NC C
Relay 2 Relay 3 Trouble
SUPERVISORY 10 LK27 LK26 26
J10 Install W1
SILENCE SCROLL 0 LK10 LK9 9 25

S2
+24 V

Style 4
8 LK25 LK24 24
Com 7 23
PS Flt LK8 LK7
6 22
LK23 LK22
5 21
LK6 LK5 4 20
3 LK21 LK20
19
Trouble Lamp Test
NAC 2

A 2 18
1 2 3 4

TB3 Sup. Com


B LK4 LK3 1 17
TB14 Sil. Out Ack LK19 LK18

- -
Pre Alm Reset
+ LK2 LK1
+ Alarm Silence
Batt Out
Pwr On Drill
NAC 1
1 2 3 4

TB5

J12
PSU
N
240
Release 1 Release 2 Aux 24 VDC Combo 1 Combo 2

AC IN
L
120 TB11 TB2 TB7 TB6
TB13 TB12 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Figure 2-27. Single-Channel RS-485 Wiring to Peripheral Devices


Refer to Figure 2-29 for maximum-length estimation.
Note: All wiring is power-limited and supervised.
Installation

December 2004
Installation

December 2004
Maximum Length: 4,000 Ft.
W1
(Twisted, Shielded, Low-Capacitance Wire) SW1
Install Jumper VR2
VR1
RDCM Circuit Board
1 TB1
2
3 JK2
4
5
6
7 JK1
8

W2
SW2
Remove W2 DS1

Connect wires for shields to earth-


ground screw in upper-edge of PCB. Connect wires for shields together at each
intermediate remote annunciator. Do not connect
wires for shields to the earth-ground screw in
remote enclosures.

TB1 TB15
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

J3 J5 RS-232 A Leave shield wires floating at last remote annunciator. Do not


J6 J3
SLC RS 485 USB A
USB B connect wires for shields to the earth-ground screw in last
RS-232 B J8
remote enclosure. Trim shield wires as much as possible.
SLC

S2 S1 LK17

Relay 1
LK32
LK16 LK15

2-26
NO NC C NO NC C
Out B 16 32
POWER ON TM 1 2 3
LK31 LK30
ACKNOWLEDGE Out A ATM-L 15 31
ALARM In B LK14 LK13 14 30

NO NC C
SILENCE 4 5 6 In A 13 29
PRE-ALARM LK29 LK28
12 28
TROUBLE RESET 7 8 9
W1 LK12 LK11 11 27

NO NC C
Relay 2 Relay 3 Trouble
SUPERVISORY 10 LK27 LK26 26
J10 Install W1
SILENCE SCROLL 0 LK10 LK9 9 25

S2
+24 V

Style 4
8 LK25 LK24 24
Com 7 23
PS Flt LK8 LK7
6 22
LK23 LK22
5 21
LK6 LK5 4 20
3 LK21 LK20
19
Trouble Lamp Test

NAC 2
A 2 18

1 2 3 4
TB3 Sup. Com
B LK4 LK3 1 17
TB14 Sil. Out Ack LK19 LK18

- -
Pre Alm Reset
+ LK2 LK1
Alarm Silence
peripheral devices using a dual-channel communications circuit.

+
Batt Out
Pwr On Drill

NAC 1
1 2 3 4

TB5

J12
PSU
N
240
Release 1 Release 2 Aux 24 VDC Combo 1 Combo 2

AC IN
L
120 TB11 TB2 TB7 TB6
TB13 TB12 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Figure 2-28. Dual-Channel RS-485 Wiring to Peripheral Devices


Refer to Figure 2-29 for maximum-length estimation.
Note: All wiring is power-limited and supervised.
Figure 2-28 shows typical interconnections among the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit and the

P/N 06-236529-001
Installation

Use Figure 2-29 to estimate the maximum length of wire that can be connected to an Auxiliary-Power
Output as a function of RS-485 peripheral-devices current.

4000

3500

3000
#1
2A
W G
Maximum Distance (Ft.)

2500

#1
4A
2000 WG

1500 #1
6A
W G

1000 #1
8A
WG

500

0
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

Total Current (A) for RS-485 Peripheral Devices

Figure 2-29. 24 Vdc-Power Wiring Length vs. Peripheral-Devices Current

Refer to the installation manuals for the remote display module and driver modules for address
selection and additional point-to-point-connection details. The numbers of peripheral devices for a
particular application are specified via the FENWALNET 6000 Programmer’s Guide.

2-14 RELAYS

The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit has three Form-C, programmable relays and one Form-C, trouble
relay as shown in Figure 2-30. All of these relays have the following contact ratings:
• 1.0 A @ 30 Vdc (resistive)
• 0.5 A @ 30 Vdc (inductive)
• 0.5 A @ 120 Vac (inductive)
NO

Programmable Relay No. 1


NC
C
NO

Programmable Relay No. 2


NC
C
NO

Programmable Relay No. 3


NC
C
NO

Relay No. 4 (Trouble)


NC
C

Figure 2-30. Programmable and Trouble Relays

P/N 06-236529-001 2-27 December 2004


Installation

2-15 RS-232 COMMUNICATIONS PORT

The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit has two RS-232 communications ports (J3 and J8) to connect to
various third-party supplementary devices such as serial printers and graphical monitoring systems.
The default parameters for these communications ports are:
• 9600 Baud Rate
• No Parity
• 8 Bit Word Length
• 1 Start Bit
• 1 Stop Bit

The RS-232 connection to the main printed-circuit board is via an RJ12 socket. The following signals
are communicated via the RJ12 socket’s pins:

Table 2-2. RJ12 Socket Pin Signals

Signal Designation Pin No.

Transmit Data TX 1
Signal Ground Gnd 5
Request to Send RTS 3
Clear to Send CTS 4
Receive Data RX 6

Note: Pin No. 2 is not used.

The RS-232 communications port can be connected to its associated supplementary device with a
standard RS-232 cable of up to 50 feet in length.

J3
J8

Pin 1

Pin 1

Figure 2-31. RS-232 Communications Ports

December 2004 2-28 P/N 06-236529-001


Installation

2-16 USB COMMUNICATIONS PORT

The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit has one USB communications port to act as a device for a laptop
computer being used to upload and download a system configuration or to download the event logs.

The USB port connects to the laptop computer via a standard USB cable.
Note: When using the USB port, the ground fault circuitry is not functional. The USB port is to be
used to download configurations and operating system software only. It is not intended to be
used on a permanent basis. A ground fault will be reported if the USB cable is connected and
no communications activity has occurred for 30 minutes. Do not connect or disconnect the
USB cable while the control unit is powering up on system startup or initializing after a new
configuration upload.

USB Device Port


(to PC for
configuration
upload/download)

J6

USB B

Figure 2-32. USB Communications Port

P/N 06-236529-001 2-29 December 2004


Installation

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

December 2004 2-30 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

CHAPTER 3
SYSTEM OPERATIONS

3-1 FENWALNET 6000 SYSTEM OPERATIONS OVERVIEW

This chapter deals with the operation of a FENWALNET 6000 system.

The FENWALNET 6000 System uses field-programmable software. Refer to the Configuration Software
User’s Guide in P/N 74-600000-008 for instructions on how to program the FENWALNET 6000
System.

3-2 SYSTEM OPERATION

This section instructs the end-user how to operate a FENWALNET 6000 System, including how to
distinguish the different operating states, how to use the operator keys, and what the status indicating
LEDs mean.

Refer also to the Operating Instructions, P/N 06-236405-001, that are packaged with the FENWALNET
6000 Control Unit.

3-2.1 Operating States

The FENWALNET 6000 system has two operating modes: Normal and Off-Normal. Normal
Mode is characterized by the absence of any initiating signals from either automatic detectors
or monitor modules, and by the absence of trouble conditions. Off-Normal Mode is triggered
by system events or operator interrogation via the keypad. Off-Normal Mode operating states
are listed in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1. Off-Normal Mode Operating States

Operating State Triggering Event(s)

Access-Via-Menu A operator uses the keypad to isolate initiating devices and/or outputs, list configuration
settings and the application program, adjust configuration settings, or manually initiate
testing procedures.
Trouble A report of a problem that could prevent the FENWALNET 6000 System from proper
operation. Typical trouble signals include: Lack of response from a configured device on the
signaling line circuit; Internal fault reported by a SmartOne detector; Loss of monitoring
integrity of the installation conductors; Power-supply fault; and/or Loss of primary AC
power.
Alarm An automatic spot-type smoke or heat detector or a high-sensitivity smoke detector senses a
fire signature that is greater than the detector's programmable alarm threshold, or when a
monitor module programmed as a manual-alarm, manual-release, waterflow or general-
alarm point activates.
Pre-Alarm An automatic spot-type smoke, heat detector or a high-sensitivity smoke detector senses a
fire signature that is greater than a programmable, lower-level warning threshold but less
than the detector's programmable alarm threshold.
Supervisory A monitor module detects a condition such as gate-valve closure, low air pressure or water
level, or pump failure that could impair the operation of a building's sprinkler system. It
also enters this state when an operator isolates any initiating or control devices or control-
unit-based output circuits. This mode is primarily event-driven.

3-2.2 Outputs Activation

The FENWALNET 6000 System operation is control by events. Control-unit-based or


signaling-line-circuit-based outputs are activated by user-specified operating instructions

P/N 06-236529-001 3-1 December 2004


System Operations

contained in the system’s event output control (EOC) program. The EOC program is
triggered by any event that transitions the system from the Normal Mode to an event-
driven, Off-Normal operating state.
Note: All alarm events must be annunciated by public-mode notification.

3-2.3 Operator Keys

Operator keys for the FENWALNET 6000 System are located on the display inside the control
unit. The control unit door must be open to access the operator keys.

Figure 3-1 shows the location of the operator keys and status indicating LEDs on the display.
Table 3-2 lists the names and functions of the operator keys on the display.

80 Character
Liquid Crystal Display
with LED Back Lighting
(2 Lines x 40 Characters)

12-key numeric /
BACKSPACE /
ENTER keypad

POWER ON TM
ACKNOWLEDGE 1 2 3
ALARM
ENTER Key
SILENCE 4 5 6
PRE-ALARM
TROUBLE
RESET 7 8 9
SUPERVISORY
SCROLL 0
R

SILENCE

BACKSPACE Key
System Status LEDs Operator Control Keys

Figure 3-1. Display Panel

December 2004 3-2 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

Table 3-2. Operator Control Keys and Functions

BUTTON FUNCTION

<ACKNOWLEDGE> The <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key allows the operator to signal the FENWALNET 6000
System Control Unit that a new event currently being displayed is understood. The
control unit's audible notification appliance will silence and all flashing Pre-Alarm, Alarm,
Supervisory, or Trouble LEDs will light steadily when all active events have been
acknowledged.
<SILENCE> Pressing the <SILENCE> Key after all current alarm events have been acknowledged
shuts off any active, silenceable control-unit-based or signaling-line-circuit-based outputs,
such as notification-appliance circuits or control modules.
Note: There is a 10-second buffer period during which subsequent presses of the
<SILENCE> Key are intentionally ignored. A subsequent key press will only be acted
upon after at least 10 seconds have elapsed since the previous key press.
<RESET> The <RESET> Key restores the FENWALNET 6000 System to Normal Mode after all
alarm system events have been acknowledged and have ceased reporting alarm
conditions.
<SCROLL> The <SCROLL> Key allows the operator to view all currently-active events by time of
occurrence. Also used to navigate through the menu options.
NUMERIC KEYPAD (0-9) Used to enter passwords, navigate through the menu options, and specify numeric
operating data.
<BACKSPACE> Used to exit the menu system and to delete incorrect entries.
<ENTER> Used as the <ENTER> Key for the menu system.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-3 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.4 Status Indicating LEDs

Table 3-3 lists the names and functions of the system status LEDs on the display.

Table 3-3. System Status LEDs and Functions

LED COLOR FUNCTION

Power On Green A steady LED indicates primary AC power is on at acceptable levels.


An unlit LED indicates unacceptable AC power levels or AC power is disconnected.
Alarm Red A flashing LED indicates one or more unacknowledged alarm events, or that a
previously-acknowledged non-latching alarm device has issued an alarm-off report.
A steady LED indicates all alarm events and alarm-off reports have been
acknowledged.
The LED turns off when the control unit is reset if all current alarm events and
alarm-off messages have been acknowledged and none of the alarm-initiating
devices are reporting alarms.
Pre-Alarm Yellow A flashing LED indicates unacknowledged pre-alarm events.
A steady LED indicates all current pre-alarm events have been acknowledged.
The LED turns off when the control unit receives pre-alarm-off messages from all
alarm-initiating devices that had reported a pre-alarm.
Trouble Yellow A flashing LED indicates unacknowledged trouble events.
A steady LED indicates all trouble events have been acknowledged.
The LED turns off when the control unit receives trouble-off messages from all SLC
devices or control-unit monitoring circuitry that had reported trouble conditions.
Supervisory Yellow A flashing LED indicates one or more unacknowledged supervisory events.
A steady LED indicates all supervisory events have been acknowledged.
The LED turns off when the control unit receives supervisory-off messages from all
initiating devices that had reported supervisory conditions.
Silence Yellow A steady LED indicates the Silence Key has been pressed after all current alarm
events have been acknowledged.
The LED turns off when 1) the control unit is reset, or 2) the Silence key is pressed
to toggle on any previously-silenced NACs and SLC-based modules. The Silence
key will repeatedly toggle the NACs and SLC-based modules off and on and the
Silence LED will track the activation state of the NACs and modules until the
control unit is reset.

December 2004 3-4 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5 Operating Instructions

The following paragraphs give general operating instructions for a stand-alone system.
3-2.5.1 NORMAL OPERATION
There are no active events such as alarms or troubles during Normal Mode operation.
The control unit continuously monitors all initiating devices and supervised circuits for
any changes of state.
The LCD display shows the “System Status Normal” message, the time and date, and
an optional user-defined custom message as shown in Figure 3-2.

System Normal
Message

SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 02:15 PM 07/02/04


North Communications Center

Site-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-2. Normal Operation Display


3-2.5.2 MENU OPERATION
The FENWALNET 6000 has a built-in menu structure. This menu structure has been
implemented to aid users with system operating functions. The following paragraphs
describe the menu structure, how to access the menu, menu functions, and how to exit
the menu.
An operator can use menu operation to:
• Isolate initiating devices and/or outputs
• List configuration settings and the application program
• Adjust configuration settings
• Initiate manual testing procedures
An operator cannot use menu operation if:
• He is attempting to access the main menu via an RDCM while another operator
already has access to the system
• Another operator already has access to the system through the configuration
program’s terminal-emulation mode (Refer to the FENWALNET 6000
Programming Guide for information on terminal-emulation mode.)
Any of the following events cancel Menu operation:
• An alarm signal
• An operator presses the <Backspace> Key at the main menu.
• A period of 60 seconds elapses from the last pressed key.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-5 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.1 Menu Functions


Note: The control unit continuously monitors all initiating devices and
outputs for any state change while in menu operation.
The main menu functions are shown in Figure 3-3.
Most functions will require additional data to be entered to implement the
function, such as a device address or desired alarm threshold.

1: ISOLATE 2: LIST
3: SET 4: TEST

Figure 3-3. Main Menu Functions


Table 3-4 lists and provides a brief description of typical functions that can be
performed using the FENWALNET 6000 System’s menus. Figure 3-4 contains
the FENWALNET 6000 main menu functions and top-level displays.

Table 3-4. Main Menu Functions and Descriptions

Menu Function Description

Isolation Device and The isolation commands prevent the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit from acting
Circuit Isolation upon signals from initiating devices or from issuing activation commands to control-
unit-based and SLC-based outputs. The initiating devices and outputs remain
operational, but are disconnected from the control unit in the sense that events
reported by isolated initiating devices are ignored by the control unit and commands
to activate are ignored by isolated outputs and control modules.
List Listing of Events The list commands are used to view the set of isolated initiating devices and control-
and System unit-based and SLC-based outputs. These commands are also used to display
Settings configuration settings for automatic initiating devices, to display the list of devices on
the SLC and to view lower-level events that are not displayed due to the occurrence of
higher-level events.
Set Change The set commands allow the installer to change the sensitivity settings for Smart-One
Operating automatic initiating devices, to address and register initiating and control devices, or
Parameters to define global operating parameters such as Global Acknowledgement of trouble
and supervisory events. These commands are also used to trigger automatic
configuration routines such as AutoLearn and AutoSetup.
Test Confirming The test commands enable service personnel to test the SmartOne initiating devices
Proper for the ability to transmit alarm signals. You can also perform alarm-simulation tests
Operation for the system's application program and can command on control modules
connected to the SLC.

December 2004 3-6 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

Please Enter Password

1:ISOLATE 2:LIST 3:SET 4:TEST

1. SLC Devices 1. Isolated Devices 1. Time / Date 1. SLC Devices

2. Outputs 2. Event Logs 2. Port Control 2. Walk Test

3: Control Modules 3. Detector Level 3. SLC Devices 3. Fire Drill

4: Global Isolate 4. Active Events 4. Programming 4. BatteryTest

5 .Isolation Macro 1 5. EOC Program 5. Globals 5. Alarm Simulation Test

6. Isolation Macro 2 6. SLC Assignments 6. Network (Future) 6. Outputs-Activation Test

7. Voltages 7. Control Modules 7. Lamp Test

8. SLC Resistance
8. OnBoard Circuits 8. HSDS (Future)

9. Disable Battery
9. More Options 9. More Options

Level-2 (Installer) Password required.

Figure 3-4. FENWALNET 6000 Menu Functions and Top-Level Displays

P/N 06-236529-001 3-7 December 2004


System Operations

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

December 2004 3-8 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

Enter Password Press "0" Key

1. Isolate
8. HSDs
1. SLC Devices 2. Outputs 3. Control Modules 4. Global Isolate 5. Isolate Macro 1 6. Isolate Macro 2
(Future)

Isolate SLC Devices 1. Isolate NACs 1. Isolate 1. Inputs *


Devices from * _ _ to _ _ _ SG * to SG
Isolate Control / Display Modules
1: Isolate 2: De-Isolate * 1: ATM 2: RDCM * Global Isolation of Inputs
1: Isolate 2: De-Isolate *
1. Isolate 2: De-Isolate *
2. Isolate Release Circuits 1: Enter the ATM Number to Isolate
AR * to AR ATM: *_

2. Outputs *
1. Isolate 2: De-Isolate * 2: Enter the RDCM Number to Isolate
RDCM: *_
3. Isolate Combo Circuits
Combo * to Combo Global Isolation of Outputs
1. Isolate 2: De-Isolate *
1. Isolate 2: De-Isolate *

2. De-Isolate
4. Isolate Relays
Relay * to Relay
De-Isolate Control / Display Modules
1: ATM 2: RDCM *
1. Isolate 2: De-Isolate *
1: Enter the ATM Number to De-Isolate
ATM: *_

2: Enter the RDCM Number to De-Isolate


RDCM: *_

2. List
8. HSDs
1. Isolated Devices 2. Event Logs 3. Detector Levels 4. Active Events 5. EOC Program 6. SLC Assignments 7. Voltages 9. More Options
(Future)

1. SLC Devices * 1. All System Events SLC Detector Levels 1. Pre-Alarm Events Addr Type Owner Location 1. SLC Device Line Voltage 1. Onboard Circuits
SLC Devices from * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255) SLC Devices From * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255)

2. Outputs * 2. Alarm Events


2. Range of Events
1. Enter NAC Circuit Number:
2. Detector 9 Volt Reading SG *
3. Control Modules * 3. Supervisories
SLC Devices From * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255)
Enter Begin and End Dates for Range
Date Range *_-_ _-_ _ to _ _-_ _-_ _ (MMDDYY)
2. Enter Release Circuit Number:
4. Troubles
AR *
3. Battery Charge
3. SLC Test Results
3. Enter Combo Circuit Number:
SG *

SLC Test Results Listing


SLC Devices From *_ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255) 4. Enter Relay Number:
RY *

4. Walk-Test Results

2. Control Module
List Control / Display Modules
SLC Test Results Listing 1. ATM 2. RDCM :*
3. Set See Figure 3-6 SLC Devices From *_ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255)

3. Network Assignments (Future)

4. Test
1. SLC Devices 2. Walk Test 3. Fire Drill 4. Battery Test 5. Alarm Simulation Test 6. Outputs Test 7. Lamp Test 8. SLC Resistance 9. More Options

Start Device Test 1. Start Walk Test Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0) Alarm Simulation Test 1: NAC 1 *
SLC Devices From * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255) SLC Devices From * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255) SLC Devices From * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255)
Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0) 1. Find Dup Address

Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0) 2: NAC 2 *


2. Stop Walk Test SLC Double Address Detector LED Utility
Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0) Enter SLC Address * _ _ (1 - 255)

3: Combo 1 *
3. Silent Walk Test Press Backspace to Exit
SLC Devices From * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255) Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0)

4: Combo 2 * 2. SLC Comm Value

Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0)


SLC Communication Value
5: Release 1 *
SLC Devices From * _ _ To _ _ _ (1 - 255)
Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0)

6: Release 2 *

Legend Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0)

7: Relays *
Level-2 (Installer) Password required.

8: SLC Outputs * 1: Relay 1 * 2: Relay 2 * 3: Relay 3 * 4: Trouble Relay *

Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0) Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0) Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0) Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0)
SLC Outputs Test
SLC Devices From * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255)

Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0)

Figure 3-5. Menu Functions

P/N 06-236529-001 3-9 (Page 3-10 blank) December 2004


System Operations

3. Set
1. Time / Date 2. Port Control 3. SLC Devices

1. Set Time

1. RS232 A *
1. Device Address Change 2. Det Sen / AAM Conf. 3. Registration
1. AM / PM
Set Loop Device Address Device Registration
1: PRINTER 2: IIM (FUTURE) Present Loop Device Address*_ _
System Time (AM / PM 1 - 12 Hrs) (1 - 255) SLC Devices From *_ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255)
3: ICM 0: NOT USED * Set Target Loop Address *_ _ 1. Ionization 2. Photoelectric 3 Thermal 4 Alarmline
Enter the Time *_:_ _ (HH:MM) (1 - 255)

4. De-Registration
1. Alarm 1. Alarm Set Detector Sensitivity Set AAM Configuration
1: AM 2: PM * SLC Devices From *_ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255) SLC Devices From *_ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255)
2. RS232 B * Device De-Registration
1. Fixed Settings 1. Fixed Settings
SLC Devices From *_ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255)
Set Detector Sensitivity Set AAM Configuration
2. Military Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity 1: 50 Ft. * Switch Setting 1 to 16 *_
1: PRINTER 2: IIM (FUTURE) SLC Devices From * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255) SLC Devices From * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255) 5. Blink Control
3: ICM 0: NOT USED *
Set Time (Mil 1 - 24 Hrs))
Enter the Time *_:_ _ (HH:MM) Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity Set AAM Configuration Program Device Blink Control
1: Open Area 2: In Duct 3: DH-2000 * 1: Open Area 2: In Duct 3: DH-2000 * Pre-Alarm Level *__ (80 - 154) Pre-Alarm 1: ON 2: OFF * SLC Devices From *_ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255)

2. Set Date
Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity Set AAM Configuration Set Blink Control
Pre-Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 1.4) %/Ft. Pre-Alarm Level *._ (0.2 - 3.4) %/Ft. Alarm Level *__ (135 - 155) Alarm 1: Normal 2: Overheat * 1: Blink Off 2: Blink On
Set Date
Enter the Date *_-__-
__ (MM-DD-YY)
Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity
Set Detector Sensitivity
Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 1.5) %/Ft. Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 3.5) %/Ft.
2: 70 Ft. *
3. Battery
2. Day/Night Settings 2. Day/Night Settings
Set Detector Sensitivity
Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity Pre-Alarm Level *__ (80 - 144)
1: Batt Disp Enable2: Batt Disp Disable *
SLC Devices From * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255) SLC Devices From * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255)

Set Detector Sensitivity


Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity Alarm Level *__ (135 - 145)
1: Open Area 2: In Duct 3: DH-2000 * 1: Open Area 2: In Duct 3: DH-2000 *

Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity


Pre-Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 1.4) %/Ft. Pre-Alarm Level *._ (0.2 - 3.4) %/Ft.

Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity


Day Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 1.5) %/Ft. Day Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 3.5) %/Ft.

Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity


Night Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 1.4) %/Ft. Night Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 3.4) %/Ft.

2. Supervisory 2. Supervisory

Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity


SLC Devices From * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255) SLC Devices From * _ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255)

Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity


1: Open Area 2: In-Duct / DH-2000 * 1: Open Area 2: In-Duct / DH-2000 *

1. Fixed Settings 1. Fixed Settings

Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity


Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 1.5) %/Ft. Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 3.5) %/Ft.

2. Day / Night Settings 2. Day / Night Settings

Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity


Day Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 1.5) %/Ft. Day Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 3.5) %/Ft.

Set Detector Sensitivity Set Detector Sensitivity


Night Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 1.4) %/Ft. Night Alarm Level *._ (0.5 - 3.4) %/Ft.

6. Network 8. HSDs
4. Programming 5. Globals 7. Control Modules 9. Disable Battery
(Future) (Future)

1. Day / Night 2. Passwords 3. AutoLearn Battery Connection


1: Global Acknowledge 1. Register 1: Enable 2: Disable *

1. Set Detectors 1. Owner's


4. AutoSetup Register Control / Display Module
Global Acknowledge of Trouble / Supv 1: ATM 2: RDCM *
Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0) *
Set Day / Night / Weekend Mode Change Owner Password
SLC Devices From *_ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255) Enter New Password *_______ 5. Alarm Verification 1: Enter the ATM Number to Register
ATM: *_
2: Alarm Verification
Re-Enter New Password *________
Day / Night / Weekend Mode Assign Alarm Verification
1. Activate 2. De-Activate * SLC Devices From *_ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255) 2: Enter the RDCM Number to Register
RDCM: *_
Set Verification Period in Sec
Set Alarm Verification *_ (Max. 120 Seconds)
2. Installer's 1: Verify On 2: Verify Off *
2. Set Periods
Alarm Verification
Change Installer Password Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0) *
6. Positive Alarm Sequence
Set Day Period (Now 08:00) Enter New Password *_______
2. De-Register
Day Period Start *_:__ (24 hour clock)
Re-Enter New Password *________ Assign Positive Alarm Sequence De-Register Control / Display Module
3: PAS
SLC Devices From *_ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255) 1: ATM 2: RDCM *
Set Night Period (Now 18:00)
Night Period Start *_:__ (24 hour clock) Set Positive Alarm Sequence Set Delay Period in Seconds 1: Enter the ATM Number to De-Register
1: PAS On 2: PAS Off * *_ (Max. 180 Seconds) ATM: *_
3. Activate
7. Clear Events
Positive Alarm Sequence 2: Enter the RDCM Number to De-Register
Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0) * RDCM: *_
Nighttime Settings at Night Event Log Clear
1. Activate 2. De-Activate * 1: Clear Events 2: Exit *

4: Central Station
8. Clear Tests
Nighttime Settings on Weekend
1. Activate 2. De-Activate * Central Station Operation 3. Reset ATM / RDCM
1. Clear SLC Tests * Activate - (1) Deactivate - (0) *

Clearing SLC Test Results Reset Control Module


SLC Devices From *_ _ to _ _ _ 1: Reset 2: Exit *
(1 - 255)

2. Clear Walk Tests *


5: List Versions
Clearing Walk Test Results
SLC Devices From *_ _ to _ _ _ (1 - 255)
Legend
9. Resynch. Network (Future)

Level-2 (Installer) Password required.

Figure 3-6. Menu Functions Cont.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-11 (Page 3-12 blank) December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.2 Isolate Menu Functions


The Isolate functions prevent the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit from acting
upon signals from initiating devices or from issuing activation commands to
control unit-based and SLC-based outputs. The initiating devices and outputs
remain operational, but are disconnected from the control unit in the sense that
events reported by isolated initiating devices are ignored by the control unit and
commands to activate are ignored by isolated outputs and control modules.
A Supervisory signal will occur after each Isolation command is executed, and
will remain in effect until all Isolation commands are subsequently cancelled by
their corresponding De-Isolation commands.
For Top-Level Isolate Menu Functions, refer to Figure 3-4. For the complete
Isolate-Menu tree, refer to Figure 3-5.
The following paragraphs list the Isolate Menu functions.
3-2.5.2.2.1 How to Isolate SLC Devices
Purpose: To prevent initiating and trouble signals from selected SmartOne
automatic detectors and monitor modules from being processed and acted
upon by the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit. Also to prevent selected
SmartOne control and relay modules from carrying out activation
instructions issued by the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit.
Note: An SLC device can only be isolated if it is not in either a trouble or
alarm condition.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 1 Key Enter Isolate-Menu branch
4 Press 1 Key Select "SLC Devices" option
5 Use keypad to enter single device or range of devices Get prompt to Isolate or De-Isolate
to isolate.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection
6 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Execute Isolation Routine for single device or range
selection. of devices entered in Step 5.
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
8 Press "Acknowledge" Key. Silence buzzer and change Supervisory LED from
flashing to steady

P/N 06-236529-001 3-13 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.2.2 How to De-Isolate SLC Devices


Purpose: To enable the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit to process
initiating and trouble signals from previously-isolated SmartOne automatic
detectors and monitor modules. Also to enable previously-isolated
SmartOne control and relay modules to execute activation instructions
issued by the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 1 Key Enter Isolate-Menu branch
4 Press 1 Key Select "SLC Devices" option
5 Use keypad to enter single device or range of devices Get prompt to Isolate or De-Isolate
to de-isolate. Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
6 Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Execute De-Isolation Routine for single device or
selection. range of devices entered in Step 5.
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.2.3 How to Isolate Control-Unit-Based Outputs


Purpose: To prevent selected control-unit-based outputs from carrying out
activation instructions issued by the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 1 Key Enter Isolate-Menu branch
4 Press 2 Key Select "Outputs" option
5 Press 1 Key for NACs or Select output to isolate
Press 2 Key for Rel. Ckts or
Press 3 Key for Combo Ckts
Press 4 Key for Relays
6 Use keypad to enter single output or range of outputs Get prompt to Isolate or De-Isolate
to isolate.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
7 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Execute Isolation Routine for single output or range
selection of outputs entered in Step 6.
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
9 Press "Acknowledge" Key Silence buzzer and change Supervisory LED from
flashing to steady.

December 2004 3-14 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.2.4 How to De-Isolate Control-Unit-Based Outputs


Purpose: To enable previously-isolated control-unit-based outputs to execute
activation instructions issued by the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 1 Key Enter Isolate-Menu branch
4 Press 2 Key Select "Outputs" option
5 Press 1 Key for NACs or Select output to de-isolate
Press 2 Key for Rel. Ckts or
Press 3 Key for Combo Ckts
Press 4 Key for Relays
6 Use keypad to enter single output or range of outputs Get prompt to Isolate or De-Isolate
to de-isolate.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
7 Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Execute De-Isolation Routine for single output or
selection range of outputs entered in Step 6.
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.2.5 How to Isolate Remote-Annunciator Modules


Purpose: To prevent selected remote-annunciator modules from displaying
messages or from carrying out activation instructions issued by the
FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 1 Key Enter Isolate-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Select "Control Modules" option
5 Press 1 Key Select Isolation Routine
6 Press 1 Key for ATMs or Select module to isolate
Press 2 Key for RDCMs
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
7 Use keypad to enter module to isolate. Execute Isolation Procedure for module
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
9 Press "Acknowledge" Key Silence buzzer and change Supervisory LED from
flashing to steady

P/N 06-236529-001 3-15 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.2.6 How to De-Isolate Remote-Annunciator Modules


Purpose: To enable previously-isolated remote-annunciator modules to
display messages or to execute activation instructions issued by the
FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 1 Key Enter Isolate-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Select "Control Modules" option
5 Press 2 Key Select De-Isolation Routine
6 Press 1 Key for ATMs or Select module to de-isolate
Press 2 Key for RDCMs
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
7 Use keypad to enter module to de-isolate. Execute De-Isolation Procedure for module
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.2.7 How to Globally Isolate Initiating Devices


Purpose: To prevent initiating and trouble signals from all initiating devices
from being processed and acted upon by the FENWALNET 6000 Control
Unit

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 1 Key Enter Isolate-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select "Global Isolate" option
6 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Select Inputs
selection.
7 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Execute Isolation Routine for all initiating devices
selection.
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
9 Press "Acknowledge" Key Silence buzzer and change Supervisory LED from
flashing to steady

December 2004 3-16 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.2.8 How to Globally De-Isolate Initiating Devices


Purpose: To enable the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit to process
initiating and trouble signals from all previously-isolated initiating devices

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 1 Key Enter Isolate-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select "Global Isolate" option
6 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Select Inputs
selection.
7 Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Execute De-Isolation Routine for all initiating devices
selection.
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.2.9 How to Globally Isolate System Outputs


Purpose: To prevent all SLC-based and control-unit-based outputs (including
relays) from being activated by the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 1 Key Enter Isolate-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select "Global Isolate" option
6 Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Select Outputs
selection.
7 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Execute Isolation Routine for all output devices and
selection. circuits
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
9 Press "Acknowledge" Key Silence buzzer and change Supervisory LED from
flashing to steady

P/N 06-236529-001 3-17 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.2.10 How to Globally De-Isolate System Outputs


Purpose: To enable the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit to activate all
previously-isolated SLC-based and control-unit-based outputs (including relays)

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 1 Key Enter Isolate-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select "Global Isolate" option
6 Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Select Outputs
selection.
7 Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Execute De-Isolation Routine for all output devices
selection. and circuits
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.2.11 How to Execute a User-Defined Inputs/Outputs Isolation Routine


Purpose: To perform multiple input and/or output isolations via a single
menu selection. The inputs and/or outputs to be isolated are assigned to an
"isolation macro" that is defined via the FENWALNET 6000 Configuration
Program. The FENWALNET 6000 Configuration Program permits two
"isolation macros" to be defined. Each macro can process up to ten separate
isolation commands. The specific isolation commands are executed when
either the "Isolation Macro 1" or "Isolation Macro 2" menu options are
selected. The isolation lists can include any of the following: initiating
devices, control modules, or control-unit-based outputs individually or by
address range. This includes automatic initiating devices, monitor
modules, control modules, releasing circuits, notification-appliance
circuits, combination notification-appliance / releasing circuits, and
programmable relays. Refer to the FENWALNET 6000 Programming Guide
for the procedure to assign initiating devices, control modules, or control-
unit-based outputs to either "Isolation Macro 1" or "Isolation Macro 2".
Note: Selecting the isolation-macro option for a second time will execute
a de-isolation routine for all the devices and/or circuits that were
isolated by the execution of the isolation macro. The isolation
macros toggle the devices in the command lists between the isolated
and non-isolated states.

December 2004 3-18 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press the “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 1 Key Enter Isolate-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 5 Key or Execute "Isolation Macro 1", or
Press 6 Key Execute "Isolation Macro 2"
6 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
7 Press "Acknowledge" Key Silence buzzer and change Supervisory LED from
flashing to steady

3-2.5.2.3 List Menu Functions


The List functions are used to view the set of isolated initiating devices and
control unit-based and SLC-based outputs. These functions are also used to
display configuration settings for automatic initiating devices, to display the list
of devices on the SLC, and to view lower-level events that are not displayed due
to the occurrence of higher-level events.
For Top-Level List Menu Functions, refer to Figure 3-4. For the complete
List-Menu tree, refer to Figure 3-5.
The following paragraphs describe the List Menu functions.
3-2.5.2.3.1 How to List Isolated Devices
Purpose: To view the list of isolated devices and output circuits.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
4 Press 1 Key Access "Isolated Devices" option
5 Press 1 Key for SLC Devices or Select devices or circuits to view
Press 2 Key for Control-Unit Outputs or
Press 3 Key for Control Modules
6 Press "Scroll" Key (As Required) Move through list of isolated devices or circuits
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-19 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.3.2 How to List the Entire Contents of the System Event Log
Purpose: To view the history of system events.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
4 Press 2 Key Access "Event Logs" option
5 Press 1 Key Select All System Events
6 Press "Scroll" Key Move through list of system events
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.3.3 How to To List the Contents of the System Event Log by Dates
Purpose: To view the history of system events by selected dates.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
4 Press 2 Key Access "Event Logs" option
5 Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Select Range of Events
selection
6 Enter Start Date and End Date. Specify date range
Use month-day-year format.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
7 Press "Scroll" Key Move through list of selected system events
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-20 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.3.4 How to List the Most-Recent Test Results for the Initiating Devices on the
SLC
Purpose: To view the most-recent test results for the initiating devices on the
SLC. These tests confirm the abilities of the initiating devices to create and
transmit alarm signals that can be properly interpreted and processed by the
FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
5 Press 2 Key Access "Event Logs"
6 Press 3 Key Select SLC Test Results
7 Enter starting SLC address and ending SLC address. View most-recent test results
Use XXX format for addresses. Report format is:
Press “Enter” Key to confirm address range. Addr TP Date/Time Pass/Fail
where:
“Addr” is the device address
“TP” is the device type
“Date/Time” is test time
“Pass/Fail” shows test result.
8 Press "Scroll" Key Move through test results
9 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.3.5 How to List Most-Recent Walk-Test Results for the Initiating Devices on the
SLC
Purpose: To view the most-recent walk-test results for the initiating devices
on the SLC.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
4 Press 2 Key Access "Event Logs"
5 Press 4 Key Select Walk Test Results
6 Enter starting SLC address and ending SLC address. View most-recent test results
Use XXX format for addresses. Report format is:
Press “Enter” Key to confirm address range. Addr TP Date/Time Pass/Fail
where:
“Addr” is the device address
“TP” is the device type
“Date/Time” is test time
“Pass/Fail” shows walk-test result.
7 Press "Scroll" Key Move through walk-test results
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-21 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.3.6 How to List a Range of Automatic Detector Sensitivity Settings


Purpose: To view the pre-alarm and alarm thresholds for a range of
automatic detectors and to view the fire signatures being currently
measured by the detectors. This procedure fulfills the intent of NFPA 72
(2002) Paragraph 10.4.3.2.4, Part (4) as a test to ensure that each smoke
detector is within its listed and marked sensitivity range.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Access "Detector Level" option
5 Enter Start Address and End Address. Use XXX View detectors' pre-alarm and alarm thresholds and
format for address. levels of fire signatures being measured.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm address selection. Format for smoke detectors is:
Addr TP Pre-Alm Alm Level
Format for heat detectors is:
Addr. TP Pre-Alm Alm Level
where:
“Addr” is the device address
“TP” is the device type
“Pre-Alm” is pre-alarm setting in either %/Ft. or °F
“Alm” is alarm setting in either %/Ft. or °F
“Level” is current reading in either %/Ft. or °F
6 Press “Scroll” Key Move through list of selected detectors
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.3.7 How to List Active Events


Purpose: To view the list of active events by event type. Use this option to
view lower-level events such as trouble events whose display is suppressed
by the concurrent occurrence of higher-level events.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Access "Active Events" option
6 Press 1 Key for Pre-Alarm Events or Select event type to view
Press 2 Key for Alarm Events or
Press 3 Key for Supervisory Events or
Press 4 Key for Trouble Events.
7 Press "Scroll" Key Move through list of selected events
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-22 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.3.8 How to List the Application Program


Purpose: To view the Event-Output-Control (EOC) part of the system
configuration file.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 5 Key Access EOC Program option
6 Press "Scroll" Key Move through EOC lines
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.3.9 How to List the Devices on the SLC


Purpose: To view the registered devices on the SLC

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 6 Key Access "SLC Assignments" option
6 Press "Scroll" Key Move through SLC devices
Format for display is:
Addr Type Owner Location
Where:
"Addr" is the device address
"Type" is the device type
"Owner Location" is the device location
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-23 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.3.10 How to List a Range of SLC Device Voltages


Purpose: To view the SLC line voltages for a range of initiating and/or
control devices.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Twice Access additional options
5 Press 7 Key Access "Voltages" option
6 Press 1 Key Select line voltages
7 Enter Start Address and End Address. View devices' line voltages
Use XXX format for address. Format for devices is:
Press "Enter" Key to confirm address selection. Addr Type Voltage
8 Press "Scroll" Key Move through selected devices
9 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.3.11 How to List a Range of SLC Devices’ 9-Volt Levels


Purpose: To view the internal power-supply voltages for a range of SLC
initiating and/or control devices.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Twice Access additional options
5 Press 7 Key Access "Voltages" option
6 Press 2 Key Select 9 volt
7 Enter Start Address and End Address. View devices' 9-Volt levels
Use XXX format for address. Format for devices is:
Press "Enter" Key to confirm address selection. Addr Type 9-Volt Level
8 Press "Scroll" Key Move through selected devices
9 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-24 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.3.12 How to Ascertain that the Standby-Battery is being Recharged


Purpose: To determine if the standby battery is being recharged

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; press "Enter" Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key twice Access additional options
5 Press 7 Key Access "Voltages" option
6 Press 3 Key Determine if the standby-battery is being recharged
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.3.13 How to View the Configurable Parameters for the Control Unit’s On-Board
Outputs
Purpose: To determine how the control unit’s on-board outputs are
programmed.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; press "Enter" Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key twice Access additional options
5 Press 8 Key Access "Onboard Outputs" option
6 Press 1 Key for NACs, or Select on-board output type
Press 2 Key for Release Circuits, or
Press 3 Key for Combo Circuits, or
Press 4 Key for Programmable Relays

7 Enter on-board output number View output's configurable parameters


8 Press "Backspace" Key, and repeat Step 7 View another output of the type selected in Step 6
9 Press "Backspace" Key twice, and repeat Steps 6 and View another output type
7
10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-25 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.3.14 How to List the Remote Display Modules Connected to the Control Unit
Purpose: To view the list of remote-display modules connected to a
FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 2 Key Enter List-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key twice Access additional options
5 Press 9 Key Access "More Options"
6 Press 1 Key Select control modules
7 Press 1 Key for ATM or Select display modules to view
Press 2 Key for RDCM.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
8 Press "Scroll" Key Move through list of selected modules
9 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.4 Set Menu Functions


The Set functions allow the installer to change the sensitivity settings for
SmartOne automatic initiating devices, to address and register initiating and
control devices, or to define global operating parameters such as Global
Acknowledgment of trouble and supervisory events. These commands are also
used to trigger automatic configuration routines such as AutoLearn and
AutoSetup.
For Top-Level Set Menu Functions, refer to Figure 3-4. For the complete
Set-Menu tree, refer to Figure 3-6.
The following paragraphs list the Set Menu functions.

December 2004 3-26 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.1 How to Set the Time


Purpose: To set the correct time for a FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit. (Use
either Steps 6a or 6b in table).

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 1 Key Access "Time / Date" option
5 Press 1 Key Access "Set Time" option
6a Press 1 Key Select AM/PM format
6a.1 Enter correct time in HH:MM format Set time
where
HH is hour (0 - 12)
MM is minute (0 - 59).
6a.2 Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection
6a.3 Press 1 Key for “AM or 2 Key for “PM Specify AM or PM
6a.4 Press “Enter” Key to complete time entry
6b Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to selection Select Military format
Military Time
6b.1 Enter correct time in HH:MM format where: Set time
HH is hour (0 - 24)
MM is minute (0 - 59)
6b.2 Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.4.2 How to Set the Date


Purpose: To set the correct date for a FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 1 Key Access "Time / Date" option
5 Press 2 Key Access "Set Date" option
6 Enter correct date in MM-DD-YY format where: Set date
MM is month (1 - 12)
DD is day (1 - 31)
YY is year (00 - 99)
7 Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-27 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.3 How to Set the Display to Show the Standby-Battery Condition


Purpose: To replace the "System Status Normal" message on the display
with the standby-battery charging voltage and current. The display will have
the following typical appearance:

PS: 25.5 V 1 mA 02:15 PM 07/02/04


North Communications Center

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 1 Key Access "Time / Date" option
5 Press 3 Key Access "Battery" option
6 Press 1 Key Enable battery-charging display
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.4.4 How to Set the Display to Not Show the Standby-Battery Condition
Purpose: To replace the standby-battery charging voltage and current with
the "System Status Normal" message on the display.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 1 Key Access "Time / Date" option
5 Press 3 Key Access "Battery" option
6 Press 2 Key Disable battery-charging display
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-28 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.5 How to Configure the Communications Ports


Purpose: To change the RS-232 communications ports for use with a serial
printer, The Intelligent Communications Module (ICM), laptop or desktop
computer (PC), and/or terminal emulator. Both RS-232 communications
ports default to interface with either a PC or a terminal emulator with the
following communications settings: 9600 Baud Rate, No Parity, 8-Bit Word
Length, 1 Start Bit, 1 Stop Bit.
Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 2 Key Access "Port Control" option
5 Press 1 Key for Port J8 (RS-232 A) or Select port to configure
Press 2 Key for Port J3 (RS-232 B)
6 Press 1 Key for a Printer or Select optional device being used
Press 2 Key for ICM or
Press 0 Key for PC / Terminal Emulation.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
8 Wait until "Initializing Configuration" message
disappears from the display.

3-2.5.2.4.6 How to Change an SLC Device Address


Purpose: To create or change an SLC device address using the
FENWALNET 6000 keypad. All SLC devices are shipped with the default
address of 000. This address must be changed to a valid address in the
range 1 to 255 before the device can be used on the SLC. Only one device
with address 000 can be connected to the SLC when using this procedure
to initially address a new device. This procedure can also be used to re-
address a previously addressed device. Be sure to de-register the previous
address after the device is re-addressed.
Note: An SLC device can only have its address changed if it is not in either
a trouble or alarm condition.
Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Access "SLC Devices" option
5 Press 1 Key Select "Device Address Change"
6 Use keypad to enter default address 000 for new Specify address to be changed
device or enter existing address to be changed.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
7 Use keypad to enter target address for new device or Specify target address
enter altered address for existing device.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
9 Wait until "Initializing Configuration" message
disappears from the display.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-29 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.7 How to Change an Ionization Detector’s Pre-Alarm and Alarm Thresholds


Purpose: To change the pre-alarm and alarm thresholds of one or more
ionization detectors. The ionization detector is UL Listed and FM Approved
for alarm reporting anywhere within the obscuration range of 0.5 to 1.5
percent per foot when used for an open-area application. Alarm thresholds
can be set in 0.1 percent-per-foot increments. A pre-alarm threshold can also
be set anywhere within the obscuration range of 0.5 to 1.4 percent per foot,
but must be less than the detector's alarm threshold. Two additional alarm-
reporting ranges are defined for special applications. The in-duct range refers
to detector placement in an air duct. The DH-2000 range refers to detector
placement in a DH-2000 Duct Housing with associated sampling tubes to
monitor the air in either a supply- or return-air duct. The alarm ranges for
these special applications are as follows:

Application Pre-Alarm/Alarm Range (%/foot)

Induct 0.5 - 1.0


DH-2000 0.5 - 1.0

Ionization detectors can be automatically programmed to change alarm


thresholds by time of day if they are configured for day/night operation.
The night alarm thresholds must be less than the corresponding day
thresholds.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Access "SLC Devices" option
5 Press 2 Key Select "Det. Sen / AMM Config"
6 Press 1 Key Select Ionization Detectors
7 Press 1 Key Select alarm thresholds
8 Press 1 Key for Fixed or Press 2 Key for Day/Night Select fixed (i.e., not variable) thresholds or select
Settings. day/night (i.e. variable by time of day) thresholds
9 Use keypad to enter single detector or range of Specify detectors to change
detectors to change pre-alarm/alarm thresholds.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
10 Press 1 Key for Open Area or Specify detector application
Press 2 Key for Induct or
Press 3 Key for DH-2000
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
11 Use keypad to enter pre-alarm threshold. Set pre-alarm threshold
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
12 Use keypad to enter alarm threshold. Set alarm threshold. This is the day alarm threshold
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection. when using day/night settings.
12A Use keypad to enter night alarm threshold. Set night alarm threshold (day/night only)
Press “Enter” Key to confirm selection.
13 Wait until "Updated Thresholds for Devices" message
disappears from the display.
14 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-30 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.8 How to Change an Ionization Detector’s Supervisory Alarm Threshold

This application is not UL Listed or FM Approved


CAUTION

Purpose: To change the alarm threshold of one or more ionization detectors


reporting as supervisory initiating devices. The ionization detector can be
programmed to report a supervisory condition anywhere within the
obscuration range of 0.5 to 1.5 percent per foot when used in an open-area
application. Supervisory alarm thresholds can be set in 0.1 percent-per-foot
increments. One additional supervisory-reporting range is defined for a
special application. The Induct/DH-2000 range refers to detector placement
in a DH-2000 Duct Housing with associated sampling tubes to monitor the
air in either a supply- or return-air duct or to detector placement in a duct.
The supervisory-alarm range for this special application is 0.5 to 1.0
percent per foot.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Access "SLC Devices" option
5 Press 2 Key Select "Det. Sen / AMM Config”
6 Press 1 Key Select Ionization Detectors
7 Press 2 Key Select supervisory thresholds
8 Use keypad to enter single detector or range of Specify detectors to change
detectors to change supervisory alarm threshold.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection
9 Press 1 Key for Open Area or Specify detector application
Press 2 Key for In-duct/DH-2000.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
10 Press 1 Key for “Fixed” or Press 2 Key for “Day/Night” Select fixed (i.e., not variable) thresholds or select
settings. day/night (i.e., variable by the time of day) thresholds
Press “Enter” Key to confirm selection
11 Use keypad to enter supervisory-alarm threshold. Set supervisory-alarm threshold. This is the day
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection. alarm threshold when using day/night settings.
11A Use keypad to enter night supervisory-alarm Set night supervisory-alarm threshold (day/night
threshold. Press “Enter” Key to confirm selection. only).
12 Wait until "Updated Thresholds for Devices xx"
message disappears from the display.
13 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-31 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.9 How to Change a Photoelectric Detector's Pre-Alarm and Alarm Thresholds


Purpose: To change the pre-alarm and alarm thresholds of one or more
photoelectric detectors. The photoelectric detector is UL Listed and FM
Approved for alarm reporting anywhere within the obscuration range of 0.5
to 3.5 percent per foot when used for an open-area application. Alarm
thresholds can be set in 0.1 percent-per-foot increments. A pre-alarm
threshold can also be set anywhere within the obscuration range of 0.2 to
3.4 percent per foot, but must be less than the detector's alarm threshold.
Two additional alarm-reporting ranges are defined for special applications.
The in-duct range refers to detector placement in an air duct. The DH-2000
range refers to detector placement in a DH-2000 Duct Housing with
associated sampling tubes to monitor the air in either a supply- or return-
air duct. The alarm ranges for these special applications are as follows:

Application Pre-Alm Range (%/ft.) Alm Range (%/ft.)

In-duct 0.2 - 1.9 0.5 - 2.0


DH-2000 0.2 - 1.9 0.5 - 2.0

Photoelectric detectors can be automatically programmed to change


alarm thresholds by time of day if they are configured for day/night
operation. The night alarm thresholds must be less than the
corresponding day thresholds.

December 2004 3-32 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Access "SLC Devices" option
5 Press 2 Key Select "Det. Sen / AMM Config"
6 Press 2 Key Select Photoelectric Detectors
7 Press 1 Key Select alarm thresholds
8 Press 1 Key for Fixed or Press 2 Key for Day/Night Select fixed (i.e., not variable) thresholds or select
Settings. day/night (i.e. variable by time of day) thresholds
9 Use keypad to enter single detector or range of Specify detectors to change
detectors to change pre-alarm/alarm thresholds.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection
10 Press 1 Key for Open Area or Specify detector application
Press 2 Key for In-duct or
Press 3 Key for DH-2000
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
11 Use keypad to enter pre-alarm threshold. Set pre-alarm threshold
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
12 Use keypad to enter alarm threshold. Set alarm threshold. This is the day alarm threshold
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection. when using day/night settings.
12A Use keypad to enter night alarm threshold. Set night alarm threshold (day/night only)
Press “Enter” Key to confirm selection.
13 Wait until "Updated Thresholds for Device x" message
disappears from the display.
14 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-33 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.10 How to Change a Photoelectric Detector's Supervisory Alarm Threshold

This application is not UL Listed or FM Approved


CAUTION

Purpose: To change the alarm threshold of one or more photoelectric


detectors reporting as supervisory initiating devices. The photoelectric
detector can be programmed to report a supervisory condition anywhere
within the obscuration range of 0.5 to 3.5 percent per foot when used in an
open-area application. Supervisory alarm thresholds can be set in 0.1
percent-per-foot increments. One additional supervisory-reporting range is
defined for a special application. The in-duct/DH-2000 range refers to
detector placement in a DH-2000 Duct Housing with associated sampling
tubes to monitor the air in either a supply- or return-air duct or to detector
placement in a duct. The supervisory-alarm range for this special
application is 0.5 to 2.0 percent per foot.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Access "SLC Devices" option
5 Press 2 Key Select "Det. Sen / AMM Config"
6 Press 2 Key Select Photoelectric Detectors
7 Press 2 Key Select supervisory threshold
8 Use keypad to enter single detector or range of Specify detectors to change
detectors to change supervisory alarm threshold.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection
9 Press 1 Key for Open Area or Specify detector application
Press 2 Key for In-duct/DH-2000
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
10 Press 1 Key for “Fixed” or Press 2 Key for “Day/Night” Select fixed (i.e., not variable) thresholds or select
settings. day/night (i.e., variable by the time of day) thresholds
Press “Enter” Key to confirm selection
11 Use keypad to enter supervisory-alarm threshold. Set supervisory-alarm threshold. This is the day
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection. alarm threshold when using day/night settings.
11A Use keypad to enter night supervisory-alarm Set night supervisory-alarm threshold (day/night
threshold. Press “Enter” Key to confirm selection. only).
12 Wait until "Updated Thresholds for Devices xx"
message disappears from the display.
13 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-34 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.11 How to Change a Thermal Detector’s Pre-Alarm and Alarm Thresholds


Purpose: To change the pre-alarm and alarm thresholds of one or more
thermal detectors. The thermal detector is UL Listed and FM Approved for
alarm reporting anywhere in the range of 135° F to 155°F when used with a
50-foot spacing, or anywhere in the range of 135°F to 145°F when used with
a 70-foot spacing. Alarm thresholds can be set in 1F° increments. A pre-
alarm threshold can also be set anywhere within the temperature range of
80°F to 135°F, but must be less than the detector's alarm threshold.
The alarm ranges for the thermal detectors are summarized below:
Spacing (ft.) Pre-Alarm Range (°F) Alarm Range (°F)

50 80 - 135 135 - 155


70 80 - 135 135 - 145

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Access "SLC Devices" option
5 Press 2 Key Select "Det. Sen / AMM Config"
6 Press 3 Key Select Thermal Detectors
7 Use keypad to enter single detector or range of Specify detectors to change
detectors to change pre-alarm/alarm thresholds.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
8 Press 1 Key for 50-ft. Spacing or Specify detector application
Press 2 Key for 70-ft. Spacing.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
9 Use keypad to enter pre-alarm threshold. Set pre-alarm threshold
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
10 Use keypad to enter alarm threshold. Set alarm threshold
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
11 Wait until "Updated Thresholds for Device x" message
disappears from the display.
12 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-35 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.12 How to Change the Configuration of an Addressable AlarmLine Module


Purpose: To change one or more of the following Addressable AlarmLine
Module (AAM) operating characteristics for a single module or range of
modules: pre-alarm and alarm thresholds as defined by the module’s
variable-threshold-setting switch; pre-alarm reporting; alarm or overheat
reporting
Note: The AAM will create an “Overheat” message on the display if its
alarm threshold is exceeded and it is configured for overheat
reporting. The control unit buzzer will also activate.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Access "SLC Devices" option
5 Press 2 Key Select "Det. Sen / AMM Config"
6 Press 4 Key Select AlarmLine
7 Use keypad to enter single module or range of Specify modules to change
modules to change configuration settings.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
8 Use keypad to enter variable-alarm-threshold switch Specify pre-alarm/alarm thresholds based upon
setting. footage and ambient conditions.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
9 Press 1 Key to enable pre-alarm reporting or Enable/Disable pre-alarm reporting
Press 2 Key to disable pre-alarm reporting.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
10 Press 1 Key to enable alarm reporting or Select type-of-event reporting
Press 2 Key to select overheat reporting.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
11 Wait until "Updated Thresholds for Device x" message
disappears from the display.
12 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-36 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.13 How to Manually Register SLC Devices


Purpose: The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit needs to know which SLC
addresses (of the 255 possible addresses) will be occupied by a SmartOne
detector, monitor module, relay module or control module. The
Registration Procedure enters an occupied address into the control-unit's
configuration memory for each SLC device that it encounters during
execution. The SLC devices must be uniquely addressed prior to execution
of the Registration Procedure.
The SLC devices are assigned the following default-operating parameters:

SLC Device Default Operating Parameters

Ionization Detectors 0.8% per foot Pre-alarm Threshold


1.0% per foot Alarm Threshold
Latching Operation
Activates General-Alarm List
Photoelectric Detectors 1.5% per foot Pre-alarm Threshold
2.0% per foot Alarm Threshold
Latching Operation
Activates General-Alarm List
Heat Detectors 120°F Pre-Alarm Threshold
135°F Alarm Threshold
Latching Operation
Activates General-Alarm List
ITLCO/CTLCO Off
Monitor Modules (AIs) Alarm-Initiating Device
Latching Operation
Activates General-Alarm List
Monitor Modules (AIMs) Alarm-Initiating Device
Latching Operation
Activates General-Alarm List
Monitor Modules (AAMs) Alarm-Initiating Device
Latching Operation
Activates General-Alarm List
Relay Modules (AOs) Non-Silenceable Operation
In General-Alarm List
Control Modules (ASMs) Non-Silenceable Operation
Enabled for Drill Activation
Activates in Walk Test

The activation of any initiating device will activate the outputs in the general-
alarm list.
Note: SLC devices are also automatically registered and configured for
operation by the AutoLearn or AutoSetup Routines, or by a configuration
upload via the FENWALNET 6000 Configuration Program.
Exception: AIMs require additional configuration via the LASERNet
Program, and AAMs require additional configuration via the SET
Menu or the FCS-6000 Configuration Program after an AutoLearn
Procedure. Refer to Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.12 to configure AAMs via
the SET Menu.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-37 December 2004


System Operations

The Registration Procedure shall not be used to configure a system. It is primarily a


procedure to create a database of SLC devices. Owner locations are not assigned during
CAUTION the Registration Procedure.

Note: Wait for each SLC device to report a "Not-Registered" trouble


message and ensure that all these trouble messages have been
acknowledged before proceeding with the Registration Procedure.
Execute the De-Registration Procedure before re-registering any
previously-registered addresses.
Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Access "SLC Devices" option
5 Press 3 Key Select "Registration"
6 Use keypad to select address or range of addresses to Specify addresses to register
register.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
7 Wait until "Device Registration" message disappears
from the display.
8 Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.4.14 How to Manually De-Register SLC Devices


Purpose: To remove one or more SLC devices from the FENWALNET 6000
Control Unit’s configuration memory. The de-registered device(s) must be
physically removed from the SLC prior to or following the execution of the
De-Registration Procedure.

Remove all references to the de-registered devices from the system's application (i.e.,
CAUTION EOC) program.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Access "SLC Devices" option
5 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
6 Press 4 Key Select "De-Registration"
7 Use keypad to select address or range of addresses to Specify addresses to de-register
de-register.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
8 Wait until "Device DeRegistration" message
disappears from the display.
9 Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-38 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.15 How to Disable the Flashing LEDs on SmartOne Detectors


Purpose: To prevent one or more SmartOne detector LEDs from flashing in
standby operation. LEDs will only illuminate in alarm condition. The
detectors' default-LED operation is flashing.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Access "SLC Devices" option
5 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
6 Press 5 Key Select "Blink Control"
7 Use keypad to select address or range of addresses to Specify addresses to disable flashing LEDs in normal
disable LED flashing. operation
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
8 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Disable flashing LEDs
selection.
9 Wait until "Set Blink Control" message disappears
from the display.
10 Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.4.16 How to Enable the Flashing LEDs on SmartOne Detectors


Purpose: To enable one or more SmartOne detector LEDs to resume
flashing in standby operation. The flashing LEDs were disabled in a prior
blink-control operation.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Access "SLC Devices" option
5 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
6 Press 5 Key Select "Blink Control"
7 Use keypad to select address or range of addresses to Specify addresses to enable flashing LEDs in normal
re-enable detector-LED flashing. operation
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
8 Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Re-enable flashing LEDs
selection.
9 Wait until "Initializing-Configuration" message
disappears from the display.
10 Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-39 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.17 How to Activate Day/Night Operation for SmartOne Smoke Detectors


Purpose: To enable one or more SmartOne smoke detectors to
automatically adjust alarm thresholds by time of day.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select Programming option
6 Press 1 Key Select Day/Night option
7 Press 1 Key Select option to specify range of smoke detectors to
operate in day / night mode.
8 Use keypad to enter single address or range of Specify addresses to operate in day / night mode.
smoke-detector addresses to operate via day/night
mode.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
9 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Enable "Day / Night" mode
selection.
10 Wait until "Set Day/Night/Weekend Mode" message
disappears from the display.
11 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.4.18 How to De-Activate Day/Night Operation for SmartOne Smoke Detectors


Purpose: To disable one or more SmartOne smoke detectors from
automatically adjusting alarm thresholds by time of day.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select Programming option
6 Press 1 Key Select Day/Night option
7 Press 1 Key Select option to specify range of smoke detectors to
operate in day / night mode.
8 Use keypad to enter single address or range of Specify addresses to operate in day mode only.
smoke-detector addresses to operate with fixed
alarm thresholds.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
9 Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Disable "Day / Night" mode
selection.
10 Wait until "Set Day/Night/Weekend Mode" message
disappears from the display.
11 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-40 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.19 How to Change the Day/Night Periods for Smoke Detectors


Purpose: To change daytime and nighttime periods for smoke detectors.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; press "Enter" Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Access "Programming" option
6 Press 1 Key Select "Day/Night" option
7 Press 2 Key Select "Set Periods" option
8 Enter daytime start in military format (HH:MM) Specify day-start time
Press "Enter" Key to confirm day-start time.

9 Enter nighttime start in military format (HH:MM) Specify night-start time


Press "Enter" Key to confirm night-start time.
10 Wait until "Day/Night Periods Programmed" message
disappears from display.
11 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
12 Wait until "Initializing Configuration" message Resume normal operations
disappears from display

3-2.5.2.4.20 How to Activate Day/Night Alarm Thresholds for Smoke Detectors


Purpose: To activate daytime and nighttime alarm thresholds for smoke
detectors.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; press "Enter" Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Access "Programming" option
6 Press 1 Key Select "Day/Night" option
7 Press 3 Key Select "Activate" option
8 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Activate day/night settings for weekdays
selection
9 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Activate day/night settings for weekends
selection
10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
11 Wait until "Initializing Configuration" message Resume normal operations
disappears from display

P/N 06-236529-001 3-41 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.21 How to De-Activate Day/Night Alarm Thresholds for Smoke Detectors


Purpose: To de-activate daytime and nighttime alarm thresholds for smoke
detectors.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; press "Enter" Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Access "Programming" option
6 Press 1 Key Select "Day/Night" option
7 Press 3 Key Select "Activate" option
8 Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm De-activate day/night settings for weekdays
selection
9 Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm De-activate day/night settings for weekends
selection
10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
11 Wait until "Initializing Configuration" message Resume normal operations
disappears from display

3-2.5.2.4.22 How to Change the Owner’s Password


Purpose: To change the owner's password from its current setting. The
factory-default setting is 973480.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password 973480; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select Programming option
6 Press 2 Key Select "Passwords" option
7 Press 1 Key Select Owner's option
8 Use keypad to enter new password. Specify new owner's password
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
9 Use keypad to re-enter new password. Confirm new owner's password
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection
10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
11 Wait until "Initializing-Configuration" message Resume Normal Operation
disappears from the display.

December 2004 3-42 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.23 How to Change the Installer’s Password


Purpose: To change the installer’s password from its current setting. The
factory-default setting is 186591.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password 186591; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select Programming option
6 Press 2 Key Select "Passwords" option
7 Press 2 Key Select Installer's option
8 Use keypad to enter new password. Specify new installer's password
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
9 Use keypad to re-enter new password. Confirm new installer's password
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection
10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
11 Wait until "Initializing-Configuration" message Resume Normal Operations
disappears from the display.

3-2.5.2.4.24 How to Run the AutoLearn Procedure


Purpose: The primary purpose of the AutoLearn Procedure is to execute a
Registration Procedure for all currently unregistered SLC devices.
This option registers any currently unregistered SLC devices, and if no
Event-Output-Control programming exists in the control unit’s memory,
will update the general-alarm list by adding all on-board NACs and
Combination Circuits (if configured as NACs) and all SLC-based AOs and
ASMs. All general-alarm outputs are configured for silenceable operation.
Note: The dedicated releasing circuits and combination circuits, when
programmed as releasing circuits, are never included in the general-
alarm list.

The AutoLearn Procedure shall not be used to configure a system. It is primarily a


procedure to create a database of SLC devices and to build a general-alarm list of outputs.
CAUTION Owner locations are not assigned during the AutoLearn Procedure.

Note: Wait for each SLC device to report a “Not-Registered” trouble


message and ensure that all these trouble messages have been
acknowledged before proceeding with the AutoLearn Procedure.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-43 December 2004


System Operations

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select Programming option
6 Press 3 Key Activate "AutoLearn"
7 Wait until "AutoLearning Devices on SLC" message Exit Menu System and Resume Normal Operations.
disappears from the display.

3-2.5.2.4.25 How to Run the AutoSetup Procedure


Purpose: The AutoSetup Procedure executes a Registration Procedure for
all unregistered SLC devices and, in addition, configures the system for
operation as a waterless fire-suppression system. The following operating
characteristics are assigned to the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit and its
associated SLC devices.
1. SLC Device Assignments
Automatic activation of the extinguishing system will be via crossed-
zoned alarm-initiating signals generated by combinations of automatic
initiating devices assigned to any of the first 100 addresses on the SLC.
One half of the crossed-zoned alarm-initiating system will consist of any
automatic initiating device addressed within the range of 001 through
050. The other half of the crossed-zoned automatic-initiating system
will consist of any automatic initiating device addressed within the
range of 051 through 100.
Spot-type detectors from each half of the crossed-zoned detection
system must be alternated throughout the protected area.
The extinguishing system will be manually activated by monitor
modules (i.e., AIs) configured as manual-release stations. Operation of
a manual-release station will cause all alarm and shutdown devices to
operate as if the system had operated automatically and will cause an
immediate activation of the fire-extinguishing system. Operation of a
manual-release station will override the operation of all abort switches.
Each monitor module with address within the range of 101 through 105
will be assigned as a manual-release station.
Abort switches will, when operated, interrupt the countdown delay for
the activation of the extinguishing system and prevent the operation of
any alarms and control functions associated with the discharge of the
extinguishing agent. The abort switches must be momentary, dead-
man-type devices that require a constant force to remain engaged and
active. Abort switches will be configured to reset the countdown timer
to the full delay period. Each monitor module with address within the
range of 106 through 110 will be assigned as an abort station.
Each AO output module with address within the range of 111 to 115 will
be assigned as a pre-alarm output point.
Each AO output module with address within the range of 116 to 120 will
be assigned as a pre-release output point.
Each AO output module with address within the range of 121 to 125 will
be assigned as a release output point.

December 2004 3-44 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

2. Sequence of Operation
The FENWALNET 6000 will progress through the pre-alarm, pre-
release, and release states as defined in Paragraph 3-2.5.8.1. The time
delay between the pre-release and the release states will be 30 seconds.
3. Control-Unit-Based Outputs Assignments
Control-unit-based outputs will be assigned to the pre-alarm, pre-
release, and release states as follows:
Pre-Alarm State
– NAC No. 1 (steady activation)
– programmable Relay No. 1
– the owner-location field on the LCD will display the word "Pre-
Alarm"
Pre-Release State
– NAC No. 2 (steady activation)
– programmable Relay No. 2
– the owner-location field on the LCD will display the word "Pre-
Release" concurrently with the continuously-decremented
countdown timer
– deactivate NAC No. 1
Release State
– Release Circuit No. 1
– Release Circuit No. 2
– Combination NAC/Releasing Output No. 1 as a NAC (steady
activation)
– Combination NAC/Releasing Output No. 2 as a release circuit
– programmable Relay No. 3
– the owner-location field on the LCD will display the word
"Agent Release"

Owner locations are not assigned during the AutoSetup Procedure. The Abort operation
CAUTION in this setup is not UL Listed.

Note: Wait for each SLC device to report a "Not-Registered" trouble


message and ensure that all these trouble messages have been
acknowledged before proceeding with the AutoSetup Procedure.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select "Programming"
6 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
7 Press 4 Key Activate "AutoSetup"
8 Wait until "Configuring Basic Suppression System Exit Menu System and Resume Normal Operations.
and Initializing Configuration" messages disappear
from the display.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-45 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.26 How to Activate Alarm Verification for Smoke Detectors


Purpose: To activate alarm-verification for one or more smoke detectors.
Refer to Paragraph 3-2.5.5.3.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select Programming option
6 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
7 Press 5 Key Select "Alarm-Verification" option
8 Use keypad to enter single address or range of Specify addresses to be verified
smoke-detector addresses to be verified.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
9 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Activate alarm verification
selection.
10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
11 Wait until "Initializing Configuration" message Resume Normal Operations
disappears from the display.

3-2.5.2.4.27 How to De-Activate Alarm Verification for Smoke Detectors


Purpose: To de-activate alarm-verification for one or more smoke detectors.
See Paragraph 3-2.5.5.3 for the description of alarm verification.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select Programming option
6 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
7 Press 5 Key Select "Alarm-Verification" option
8 Use keypad to enter single address or range of Specify addresses for verification to be de-activated
smoke-detector addresses for verification to be de-
activated.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
9 Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm De-activate alarm verification
selection.
10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
11 Wait until "Initializing Configuration" message Resume Normal Operations
disappears from the display.

December 2004 3-46 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.28 How to Activate Positive-Alarm Sequence for Smoke Detectors


Purpose: To activate positive-alarm sequence for one or more smoke
detectors. See Paragraph 3-2.5.5.1 for the description of positive-alarm
sequence.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select Programming option
6 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
7 Press 6 Key Select "Positive-Alarm Sequence"
8 Use keypad to enter single address or range of Specify addresses for Positive-Alarm Sequence
smoke-detector addresses for positive-alarm
sequence.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
9 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Activate positive-alarm sequence
selection.
10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
11 Wait until "Initializing Configuration" message Resume Normal Operations
disappears from the display.

3-2.5.2.4.29 How to De-Activate Positive-Alarm Sequence for Smoke Detectors


Purpose: To de-activate positive-alarm sequence for one or more smoke
detectors. See Paragraph 3-2.5.5.1 for the description of positive-alarm
sequence.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select Programming option
6 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
7 Press 6 Key Select "Positive-Alarm Sequence"
8 Use keypad to enter single address or range of Specify addresses for positive-alarm sequence to be
smoke-detector addresses for PAS to be de-activated. de-activated
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
9 Press 2 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm De-activate positive-alarm sequence
selection.
10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
11 Wait until "Initializing Configuration" message Resume Normal Operations
disappears from the display.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-47 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.30 How to Clear the System Event Log


Purpose: To remove all previously recorded system events from the
FENWALNET 6000 event log.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 4 Key Select Programming option
6 Press "Scroll" Key twice Access additional options
7 Press 7 Key Select "Clear Events"
8 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Select and clear system event log
selection.
9 Wail until “Event Log Clear in Progress” message
disappears from the display.
10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.4.31 How to Clear the Contents of the SLC-Initiating Devices Test Log
Purpose: To remove the most-recently recorded results of initiating devices
tests from the SLC Test Log. All initiating devices are tested once per day to
confirm that they can transmit an acceptable event-detection signal. The
results of the most-recently-transmitted event signal are recorded in the
SLC Test Log.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional Set-Menu options
5 Press 4 Key Select Programming option
6 Press "Scroll" Key twice Access additional Programming-Menu options
7 Press 8 Key Select "Clear Tests" option
8 Press 1 Key Select Clear SLC Tests
9 Enter starting SLC address and ending SLC address. Specify range of SLC initiating devices to have test
Use XXX format for addresses. results cleared
Press “Enter” Key to confirm address range to clear.
10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-48 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.32 How to Clear the Contents of the Walk-Test Log


Purpose: To remove the most-recently recorded results of initiating-devices
walk tests from the Walk-Test Log. The results of the most-recently-
conducted walk tests are recorded in the Walk-Test Log.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; press "Enter" Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional Set-Menu options
5 Press 4 Key Select "Programming" option
6 Press "Scroll" Key twice Access additional Programming-Menu options
7 Press 8 Key Select "Clear Tests" option
8 Press 2 Key Select Clear Walk Tests
9 Enter starting SLC address and ending SLC address. Specify range of SLC initiating devices to have walk-
Use XXX format for addresses. test results cleared
Press "Enter" Key to confirm address range to clear.

10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.4.33 How to Activate Global Acknowledge


Purpose: To enable the "Acknowledge" Switch to process any combination
of up to 30 unacknowledged supervisory or trouble events.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 5 Key Select Global
6 Press 1 Key Select "Global Acknowledge"
7 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key to confirm Activate global acknowledge
selection.
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-49 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.34 How to Change the Smoke-Detectors' Alarm-Verification-Delay Period


Purpose: To change the period of time that the FENWALNET 6000 Control
Unit will wait for a second, confirming signal from a smoke detector (or any
other alarm-initiating device) that an alarm condition exists.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 5 Key Select Global
6 Press 2 Key Select "Alarm Verification"
7 Use the keypad to enter the new verification time and Set verification time (max.120 seconds)
press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
8 Wait until "Initializing Configuration" message
disappears from the display.
9 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.4.35 How to Change the Smoke-Detectors’ Positive-Alarm-Sequence


Investigation Period
Purpose: To change the period of time that the FENWALNET 6000 Control
Unit will wait for the occupants to investigate a smoke-detector’s positive-
alarm-sequence report before it executes the smoke-detector's programmed
alarm actions. The operator must reset the control unit before this time
period expires or the programmed alarm actions will occur.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 5 Key Select Global
6 Press 3 Key Select "PAS"
7 Use the keypad to enter the new investigation time Set investigation time (max. 180 seconds)
and press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
8 Wait until "Initializing Configuration" message
disappears from the display.
9 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-50 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.36 How to Configure the Control Unit for Central-Station Operation


Purpose: To allocate the programmable relays for off-premises signal
transmission to a central station. Programmable Relay No. 1 is
automatically configured to activate for any alarm condition, and
Programmable Relay No. 2 is automatically configured to activate for any
supervisory condition. Refer to Appendix A.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; press "Enter" Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional Set-Menu options
5 Press 5 Key Select "Globals" option
6 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional Globals-Menu options
7 Press 4 Key Select "Central Station" option
8 Press 1 Key, then press "Enter" Key to confirm Activate Central-Station option
selection.
9 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.4.37 How to Determine the Control-Unit Firmware Versions


Purpose: To determine the firmware versions resident in the control unit.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access

2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus

3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch

4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional Set-Menu options

5 Press 5 Key Select “Globals” option


6 Press “Scroll” Key Access additional Globals-Menu options
7 Press 6 Key Select “List Versions” option
8 Press 1 Key for Main CPU, or View installed version of firmware
Press 2 Key for SLC Version, or
Press 3 Key for Main CPU Boot, or
Press 4 Key for SLC Boot
9 Press “Backspace” Key (optional) Return to Step 8 and make another selection
10 Press “Backspace” Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-51 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.38 How to Register Remote-Annunciator Modules


Purpose: To add one or more remote-annunciator modules

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 7 Key Select "Control Modules" option
6 Press 1 Key Select Registration Routine
7 Press 1 Key for ATMs or Select module type to register
Press 2 Key for RDCMs.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
8 Use keypad to enter single module or range of Execute Registration Procedure for single module or
modules to register. range of modules entered in this step
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
9 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
10 Wait until "Initializing Configuration" message Resume Normal Operations
disappears from the display.

3-2.5.2.4.39 How to De-Register Remote-Annunciator Modules


Purpose: To remove one or more remote-annunciator modules

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 7 Key Select "Control Modules" option
6 Press 2 Key Select De-Registration Routine
7 Press 1 Key for ATMs or Select module type to de-register
Press 2 Key for RDCMs.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
8 Use keypad to enter single module or range of Execute De-Registration Procedure for single module
modules to de-register. or range of modules entered in this step
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
9 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
10 Wait until "Initializing Configuration" message Resume Normal Operations
disappears from the display.

December 2004 3-52 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.4.40 How to Reset Remote-Annunciator Modules


Purpose: To remove any off-normal indications from remote-annunciator
modules that did not clear after a reset command

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 7 Key Select "Control Modules" option
6 Press 3 Key Select Reset ATM/RDCM
7 Press 1 Key Execute reset command
8 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.4.41 How to Enable Battery Supervision


Purpose: To restore battery supervision that was disabled by the procedure
in Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.42.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key three times Access additional Set-Menu options
5 Press 9 Key Select "Disable-Battery" option
6 Press 1 Key, then press “Enter” Key Select Enable Battery Connection
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.4.42 How to Disable Battery Supervision


Purpose: To disable battery supervision for systems that are not using a
standby battery for secondary power.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 3 Key Enter Set-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key three times Access additional Set-Menu options
5 Press 9 Key Select "Disable-Battery" option
6 Press 2 Key, then press “Enter” Key Select Disable Battery Connection
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-53 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.5 Test Menu Functions


The Test functions enable service personnel to test the SmartOne initiating
devices for the ability to transmit alarm signals. You can also perform alarm-
simulation tests for the system’s application program and can command on
control modules connected to the SLC.
Test Commands are used to initiate a walk test.
Refer to Figure 3-4 for the Top-Level Test-Menu Functions. Refer to Figure 3-5
for the complete Test-Menu tree.
3-2.5.2.5.1 How to Test SLC Initiating Devices
Purpose: To manually test the capability of one or more SmartOne initiating
devices (i.e., detectors and monitor modules) to generate and transmit
alarm signals that can be properly interpreted and processed by the
FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit.
Note: The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit automatically runs this test
once a day for all the configured initiating devices on the SLC. The
most current test results for all initiating devices are stored in the
SLC Test Results log.

Physically disconnect the wiring to all agent-release and pre-action-sprinkler circuits and
activate the global-isolate-outputs routine before testing any SLC initiating devices.
CAUTION Restore the system to normal operating condition at the conclusion of these tests and any
other functional tests that were performed.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press 1 Key Select "SLC Devices" option
5 Use keypad to enter single device or range of devices Specify single device or range of devices to be tested
to test. and initiate test. Initiating devices being tested
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection. appear sequentially on the display.
A summary of the numbers of the devices that
successfully passed the test and failed the test is
displayed at the end of this procedure.
Note: All test results are logged in the SLC-Test
Results Log. Refer to Paragraph 3-2.5.2.3.4 and list
the contents of the SLC-Test Results Log to determine
the addresses of any initiating devices that failed this
test procedure. Repeat the SLC-Initiating-Devices test
for any devices that failed this test and functionally
test those devices to confirm that they are
operational. Replace any initiating devices that do not
pass the functional test.
6 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-54 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.5.2 How to Run an Audible Walk Test


Purpose: To suspend normal system operation for functional testing of one
or more SmartOne initiating devices.
The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit will not display and act upon alarm
reports from initiating devices selected for walk testing. There is no need for
the operator to acknowledge, silence, or reset an event initiated during a
walk test. The control unit will only energize outputs programmed for walk-
test activation for a period of one second following the receipt of an alarm
signal from any of the devices selected for walk testing.
Outputs programmable for walk testing include control unit-based NACs
and combination circuits configured as NACs and SLC-based output
modules (such as ASMs and AOs).
The most-current walk-test results for all initiating devices are stored in the
walk-test log. The walk-test mode will automatically end after 30 minutes of
inactivity. It can also be ended by a system reset or by the procedure in
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.4.
Any initiating devices not selected for walk testing will report events as
normal. Any alarm reported during a walk test will end the walk-test mode
and cause the alarm report to be processed as described in
Paragraph 3-2.5.4.

Physically disconnect the wiring to all agent-release and pre-action-sprinkler circuits


before walk testing any SLC initiating devices. Restore the system to normal operating
CAUTION condition at the conclusion of these tests and any other functional tests that were
performed.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-55 December 2004


System Operations

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; press "Enter" Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press 2 Key Select "Walk Test" option
5 Press 1 Key Select Start Walk Test option
6 Enter starting SLC address and ending SLC address. Specify range of SLC initiating devices to be walk
Use XXX format for addresses. tested.
Press “Enter” Key to confirm address range to walk
test.
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
8 Press "Acknowledge" Key Make "Trouble" LED light steadily and silence buzzer
9 Message System is ready for walk test
"Walk Test: On
Normal Operation Test"
appears on the display
10 Initiate an alarm from every device specified in Step Conduct walk test
6.
Warning:
Do not initiate more than one alarm from any
initiating device during a walk test.

The address and device type of each initiating device


momentarily appears on the display after it is walk
tested.
11 Conclude walk test after every initiating device
specified in Step 6 has been alarmed. Press the
"Reset" Switch or refer to Paragraph 3-2.5.2.3.4
12 List the results of the Walk Test by referring to A successful device test will be indicated by a
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.3.5 "Passed" message in the "Walk-Test" Log. An
unsuccessful device test will be indicated by a
"Failed" message. Functionally test any devices that
report a failure to confirm whether or not they are
operational. Replace any devices that fail a functional
test.

December 2004 3-56 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.5.3 How to Run a Silent Walk Test


Purpose: To suspend normal system operation for functional testing of one
or more SmartOne initiating devices.
The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit will operate identically as described
in Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.2 when in a silent walk-test mode, except that it will
not energize the outputs programmed for walk-test activation.

Physically disconnect the wiring to all agent-release and pre-action-sprinkler circuits


before walk testing any SLC initiating devices. Restore the system to normal operating
CAUTION condition at the conclusion of these tests and any other functional tests that were
performed.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; press "Enter" Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press 2 Key Select "Walk Test" option
5 Press 3 Key Select Silent Walk Test option
6 Enter starting SLC address and ending SLC address. Specify range of SLC initiating devices to be walk
Use XXX format for addresses. tested.
Press “Enter” Key to confirm address range to walk
test.
7 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
8 Press "Acknowledge" Key Make "Trouble" LED light steadily and silence buzzer
9 Message System is ready for walk test
"Walk Test: On
Normal Operation Test"
appears on the display
10 Initiate an alarm from every device specified in Step Conduct walk test
6.
Warning:
Do not initiate more than one alarm from any
initiating device during a walk test.

The address and device type of each initiating device


momentarily appears on the display after it is walk
tested.
11 Conclude walk test after every initiating device
specified in Step 6 has been alarmed. Press the
"Reset" Switch or refer to Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.4
12 List the results of the Walk Test by referring to A successful device test will be indicated by a
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.3.5 "Passed" message in the "Walk-Test" Log. An
unsuccessful device test will be indicated by a
"Failed" message. Functionally test any devices that
report a failure to confirm whether or not they are
operational. Replace any devices that fail a functional
test.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-57 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.5.4 How to End Walk Test


Purpose: To terminate a walk test.
Note: The walk-test mode will automatically end after 30 minutes of
inactivity. It can also be stopped by a system reset.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press 2 Key Select "Walk Test" option
5 Press 2 Key End walk test
6 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.5.5 How to Activate a Fire Drill


Purpose: To manually activate one or more NACs and/or control modules
that are programmed for operation during a fire drill.
Note: Each NAC or control module must be programmed for drill
operation via the FENWALNET 6000 Configuration Program. The
fire drill must be ended via a menu operation or a system reset
before the system can be returned to normal operating condition.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Select "Fire Drill"
5 Press 1 Key, then Press “Enter” Key Initiate fire drill
6 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.5.6 How to End a Fire Drill


Purpose: To manually conclude a fire drill.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press 3 Key Select "Fire Drill"
5 Press 0 Key, then Press “Enter” Key Stop fire drill
6 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-58 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.5.7 How to Run a Battery Test


Purpose: To measure the standby battery's open-circuit voltage and the
power-supply unit’s output voltage.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press “Scroll” Key Access additional Test-Menu options
5 Press 4 Key Run battery test.
The following voltages are measured:
(1) battery open-circuit
(2) power-supply output
6 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.5.8 How to Run an Alarm-Simulation Test


Purpose: To activate system outputs by simulating an initiating-device event
during system testing. The initiating device is not activated. The
FENWALNET 6000 system outputs are activated as if the simulated
initiating device had actually reported an alarm condition.
The simulated alarm report causes execution of the control unit's
application program and activates any outputs in the general-alarm list.
Event acknowledgment, alarms silencing, and a system reset are required
to return the system to normal operating condition.
Note: The simulated alarm report must be manually de-activated via a
menu operation before the system can be reset and returned to
normal operating condition.
The alarm-simulation test can be run concurrently for multiple devices to test
counting and crossed-zoned applications. Subsequent alarm acknowledgment
and silencing are required. Each simulated initiating device must be manually
de-activated via the menu before the control unit can be reset.

Isolate all releasing outputs using the Isolate function and physically disconnect the wiring to
all agent-release, pre-action-sprinkler and auxiliary control circuits before running any alarm-
CAUTION simulation test(s). Restore the system to normal operating condition at the conclusion of these
tests and any other functional tests that were performed.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-59 December 2004


System Operations

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 5 Key Select "Alarm Simulation Test"
6 Use keypad to enter initiating device to be alarm Specify device to be alarm simulated
simulated.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
7 Press 1 Key and Press “Enter” Key Initiate simulation
8 Press "Acknowledge" and "Silence" Keys (as Execute proper operator procedures
appropriate)
9 Repeat Steps 6 to 8 (as required) Simulate multiple-device actuations
10 De-activate all simulated initiating devices See Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.9
11 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
12 Press “Reset” Switch Resume Normal Operations

3-2.5.2.5.9 How to De-Activate an Alarm-Simulation Test


Purpose: To report an "alarm-off" message from an initiating device whose
activation was simulated.
Note: Each simulated alarm report must be manually de-activated via
this menu operation before the system can be returned to
normal operating condition.

Isolate all releasing outputs using the Isolate function and physically disconnect the wiring to
all agent-release and pre-action-sprinkler circuits and auxiliary control circuits before running
CAUTION any alarm-simulation test(s). Restore the system to normal operating condition at the
conclusion of all simulated alarm tests and any other functional tests that were performed.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional options
5 Press 5 Key Select "Alarm Simulation Test"
6 Use keypad to enter initiating device to report "alarm Specify device to issue "alarm-off" message
off."
Press "Enter" Key to confirm selection.
7 Press 0 Key and Press “Enter” Key Initiate "alarm-off" message
8 Press "Acknowledge" Key Make Alarm LED flash steadily
9 Repeat Steps 6 to 8 (as required) Report "alarm-off" for all simulated initiating devices
10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System
11 Press "Reset" Switch Return to Normal Operating Condition

December 2004 3-60 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.5.10 How to Activate Control-Unit-Based Outputs


Purpose: To manually activate control-unit outputs during system testing to
confirm proper operation.

There is no indication at the control unit that an output is activated. Be sure to de-activate
the output after proper operation has been confirmed.
Ensure that the outputs will not activate suppression systems or critical facility
operations such as computer power. Physically disconnect all agent-release and pre-
CAUTION action-sprinkler circuits and bypass all affected power-off circuits before activating any
outputs if the outputs are activating suppression systems or are shutting off power.
Restore the system to normal operating condition at the conclusion of all output
activation and any other functional tests.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; press "Enter" Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional Test-Menu options
5 Press 6 Key Select "Outputs Test" option
6 Press 1 Key for NAC 1, or Specify output to activate
Press 2 Key for NAC 2, or
Press 3 Key for Combo 1, or
Press 4 Key for Combo 2, or
Press 5 Key for Release 1, or
Press 6 Key for Release 2, or
Press 7 Key for Relays
6a Press 1 Key for Relay 1, or Specify relay to activate
Press 2 Key for Relay 2, or
Press 3 Key for Relay 3, or
Press 4 Key for Trouble Relay

(if Relays selected in Step 6)


7 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key Initiate output activation specified in Step 6 and 6a
8 Return to Step 6 and make another selection Activate additional outputs
(optional)
9 De-activate all outputs after confirming proper See Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.11
operation
10 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-61 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.5.11 How to De-Activate Control-Unit-Based Outputs


Purpose: To manually de-activate control-unit outputs that were activated
during system testing.

There is no indication at the control unit that an output is activated. Be sure to de-activate
the output after proper operation has been confirmed.
Ensure that the outputs will not activate suppression systems or critical facility
operations such as computer power. Physically disconnect all agent-release and pre-
CAUTION action-sprinkler circuits and bypass all affected power-off circuits before activating any
outputs if the outputs are activating suppression systems or are shutting off power.
Restore the system to normal operating condition at the conclusion of all output
activation and any other functional tests.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; press "Enter" Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional Test-Menu options
5 Press 6 Key Select "Outputs Test" option
6 Press 1 Key for NAC 1, or Specify output to de-activate
Press 2 Key for NAC 2, or
Press 3 Key for Combo 1, or
Press 4 Key for Combo 2, or
Press 5 Key for Release 2, or
Press 6 Key for Release 2, or
Press 7 Key for Relays
6a Press 1 Key for Relay 1, or Specify relay to de-activate
Press 2 Key for Relay 2, or
Press 3 Key for Relay 3, or
Press 4 Key for Trouble Relay

(if Relays selected in Step 6)


7 Press 0 Key and then press "Enter" Key Initiate output de-activation specified in Step 6 and
6a
8 Return to Step 6 and make another selection De-activate additional outputs
(optional)
9 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-62 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.5.12 How to Activate Control Modules (i.e., as AO or ASM)


Purpose: To manually activate one or more control modules during system
testing to confirm the proper operation of control functions via AOs or NAC
operation via ASMs.
Note: All control modules must be manually de-activated via a menu
operation or a system reset before the system can be returned to
normal operating condition.

There is no indication at the control unit that an output is activated. Be sure to de-activate
the output after proper operation has been confirmed.
Ensure that the control modules are not activating suppression systems or controlling
critical facility operations such as computer power. Physically disconnect the wiring to all
CAUTION agent-release and pre-action-sprinkler circuits and bypass all affected power-off circuits
before activating any control modules if the control modules are activating suppression
systems or are shutting off power. Restore the system to normal operating condition at
the conclusion of all control-module activations and any other functional tests.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; press "Enter" Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional Test-Menu options
5 Press 6 Key Select "Outputs Test" option
6 Press "Scroll" Key twice Access additional Outputs-Test options
7 Press 8 Key Select "SLC Outputs"
8 Enter starting SLC address and ending SLC address. Specify range of control modules to activate.
Use XXX format for addresses.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm address range of control
modules to activate.
9 Press 1 Key and then press "Enter" Key Initiate control-module activation specified in Step 8
10 Return to Step 8 and make another selection Activate additional control modules
(optional)
11 De-activate all control modules after confirming See Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.13
proper operation
12 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-63 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.5.13 How to De-Activate Control Modules (i.e., AO or ASM)


Purpose: To manually de-activate one or more control modules that were
activated during system testing.
Note: Each control module must be manually de-activated via this menu
operation or a system reset before the system can be returned to
normal operating condition.

There is no indication at the control unit that an output is activated. Be sure to de-activate
the output after proper operation has been confirmed.
Ensure that the control modules are not activating suppression systems or controlling
critical facility operations such as computer power. Physically disconnect the wiring to all
CAUTION agent-release and pre-action-sprinkler circuits and bypass all affected power-off circuits
before activating any control modules if the control modules are activating suppression
systems or are shutting off power. Restore the system to normal operating condition at
the conclusion of all control-module activations and any other functional tests.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate Menu Access


2 Enter Password; press "Enter" Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press "Scroll" Key Access additional Test-Menu options
5 Press 6 Key Select "Outputs Test" option
6 Press "Scroll" Key twice Access additional Outputs-Test options
7 Press 8 Key Select "SLC Outputs"
8 Enter starting SLC address and ending SLC address. Specify range of control modules to de-activate.
Use XXX format for addresses.
Press "Enter" Key to confirm address range of control
modules to de-activate.
9 Press 0 Key and then press "Enter" Key Initiate control-module de-activation specified in
Step 8
10 Return to Step 8 and make another selection De-activate additional control modules
(optional)
11 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

December 2004 3-64 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.2.5.14 How to Run a Lamp Test


Purpose: To test the LEDs on the keypad/display.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press “Scroll” Key Twice Access additional “Test-Menu” options
5 Press 7 Key Run LED test. Confirm that all LEDs illuminate.
6 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.5.15 How to Measure SLC Resistance


Purpose: To measure the SLC line resistance.
Note: The SLC line resistance cannot be measured for Class-B SLCs with
T-Tapping.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press “Scroll” Key Twice Access additional “Test-Menu” options
5 Press 8 Key Select “SLC Resistance” option.
Record resistance reading that appears in the
display. Resistance cannot exceed 40 ohms.
6 Press "Backspace" Key (as required) Exit Menu System

P/N 06-236529-001 3-65 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.2.5.16 How to Find a Duplicate Address


Purpose: To clear the trouble message that appears when two SLC devices
have been accidentally assigned the same address. The location of the
affected SLC devices can be found by instructing the control unit to modify
the doubly addressed devices LED pulse pattern.
Note: Only one address can be selected at a time if more than one double-
address trouble exists.

Step Action Result

1 Press 0 Key Initiate menu access


2 Enter Password; Press “Enter” Key Gain access to menus
3 Press 4 Key Enter Test-Menu branch
4 Press “Scroll” Key twice Access additional “Test-Menu” options
5 Press 9 Key Select “More Options”
6 Press 1 Key Select “Find Dup Address” option
7 Enter duplicate SLC address when message “SLC Specify duplicate address and initiate double-
DOUBLE ADDRESS LED SELECTION UTILITY” is address LED-selection utility.
displayed.
The devices with the duplicate address will flash
Use XXX format for address. their LEDs twice every 2 to 3 seconds. Locate the
devices and correct the addressing problem.
Press “Enter” Key to confirm duplicate address.
The control unit will continuously execute the
The lower line of the display changes to “PRESS
double-address LED-selection utility until manually
BACKSPACE TO EXIT”
cancelled by a press of the “Backspace” Key.
8 Press “Backspace” Key at the prompt “PRESS End double-address LED-selection utility after the
BACKSPACE TO EXIT”. devices with duplicate addresses have been located
and addresses corrected.
9 Press “Backspace” Key (as required) Exit Menu System

3-2.5.2.6 System Passwords


Password entry is required for all menu operations.
The FENWALNET 6000 System provides two distinct levels of program
protection, as required by UL Standard 864. The user can only access the menu
system by entering a valid password. Typical valid passwords consist of six
digits, but may be up to eight characters in length.
There are two security levels:
• Level One, reserved for the system owner. This is the lowest-level security.
• Level Two, reserved for the system installer. This is medium-level
security.
Passwords can consist of up to eight numeric characters (0 - 9) which allows
access from the display. Alphanumeric characters can only be used with the
FCS program; however, if used, they will lock out any possible entry to the
menus from the display. Refer to the FENWALNET 6000 Programming Guide
for the procedure to create alphanumeric passwords. Table 3-5 describes the
different password levels and their functions.

December 2004 3-66 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

Table 3-5. Password Levels and Descriptions

Password Level Description

1 Level 1 passwords permit the owner to isolate devices and circuits, view events and system
configuration, set certain parameters such as the time and date, and run low-level tests
such as a battery-voltage check.
2 Level 2 passwords permit the installer to access to all of the options available to the owner,
plus many more options that include changes to device configuration such as smoke-
detector sensitivity settings and expanded testing capabilities such as alarm-simulation
testing.

If alphanumeric passwords are necessary for a particular application, it is


recommended that the Level One password be numeric and the Level Two
password be alphanumeric so as to allow the user to retrieve system
information (system information lists) and also to prevent a user from changing
any programmed system parameters.
The FENWALNET 6000 System provides protection from unauthorized entry to
the system menus by utilizing two levels of default passwords–Level One and
Level Two. This feature provides two separate passwords which increases the
security of the system. Default passwords are set when the system is shipped
from Fenwal. Table 3-6 lists the default passwords.

Table 3-6. FENWALNET 6000 Password Levels

Level Description Password

1 Owner 973480
2 Installer 186591

Passwords can be changed following installation. Each password can be up to


eight alphanumeric characters in length. Use the menu to select the “Set
Programming Password” option to change the default numeric passwords.
3-2.5.3 TROUBLE STATE
The FENWALNET 6000 enters the Trouble State when an event occurs such as an open in
a supervised installation conductor.
The upper line of the LCD display shows the trouble event by the device or circuit
address, the type of trouble event and its state change, and the device or circuit type.
The lower line indicates the up-to-40-character message assigned to the device or
circuit using the FENWALNET 6000 configuration program.

Type of Fault

Device
Address 062 Device Type with Fault

062 OPEN ON THERMAL


FIRST FLOOR POWER ROOM

Device-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-7. Typical Trouble Message Display

P/N 06-236529-001 3-67 December 2004


System Operations

The following actions also occur when any trouble condition is reported:
• The Trouble LED on the display flashes
• The internal buzzer pulses
• The Trouble Relay de-energizes to transfer the Trouble contacts
• The trouble event is stored in the event log
• The trouble message is transmitted to peripheral devices such as RDCMs and
ATM-Ls, if applicable
• The trouble message is communicated via the RS-232 ports.
• Point- or group-specific and general trouble outputs activate, including previously
silenced outputs.
3-2.5.3.1 What to Do When a Trouble Occurs
Press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key to change the Trouble LED from flashing to
steady and to silence the internal buzzer.
It will be necessary to press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key once for each trouble
report if multiple unacknowledged trouble events are present and the
multiple-trouble-event-acknowledgment-option has not been selected. (See
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.33 to enable the multiple trouble event acknowledgment
options.)
Each acknowledged trouble event (or block of events when the multiple-
trouble-event-acknowledgment option is used) will disappear from the
display. The display changes to indicate the next unacknowledged trouble
event in the case of multiple trouble events. The active troubles can be
manually displayed in order of occurrence using the <SCROLL> Key at
this time, after all trouble events have been acknowledged. A summary of
the number of active trouble events will be displayed as shown in
Figure 3-8 at the conclusion of each manual scroll cycle.

Number of Troubles

003 ACTIVE TROUBLES REMAIN


PRESS SCROLL TO VIEW

Figure 3-8. Typical Message After Manual Trouble Scroll Cycle


A trouble event that occurs after all previous trouble events are acknowledged
will re-initialize the Trouble State as defined in Paragraph 3-2.5.3.
3-2.5.3.2 Trouble Resound
The internal buzzer will resound if one or more acknowledged trouble
conditions are still active 24 hours after they were acknowledged. The display
will show the following message:

24-HOUR TROUBLE REMINDER


PRESS ACKNOWLEDGE TO SILENCE BUZZER

Figure 3-9. 24-Hour Trouble Reminder Message


Press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key to silence the buzzer. The resound trouble
signal will also be automatically retransmitted to the supervising station.
Retransmission is accomplished by energizing the trouble relay for one minute
and then de-energizing it.

December 2004 3-68 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.3.3 How to Reset the Control Unit After a Trouble Condition


Trouble conditions are non-latching, except for an open circuit in an SLC
configured for Class-A, Style-6 or -7 operation. There is no indication that a
trouble event has cleared when multiple, acknowledged troubles are present.
The only indication will be that the trouble event as depicted in Figure 3-7 has
disappeared from the set of manually scrolled events and that the total number
of troubles displayed in Figure 3-8 has decreased.
The system will automatically return to normal operations when all of the
trouble events have cleared if events were non-latching troubles.
Press the <Reset> switch to return to normal operations after an open circuit
in an SLC configured for Class-A wiring has been repaired.
3-2.5.4 ALARM STATE
The Alarm State occurs when the FENWALNET 6000 receives an emergency signal
from an alarm-initiating device such as a smoke detector, a manual release station, or
a waterflow.
The upper line of the LCD display shows the event by the device address, the change of
state, and the device type. The lower line indicates the up-to-40-character message
assigned to the initiating device using the FENWALNET 6000 configuration program.

Alarm Indication

Device Address 010 Device Type Reporting Alarm

010 ALARM ON MANUAL STATION


COMPUTER ROOM

Device-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-10. Typical Alarm Message Display


The following actions also occur when any alarm condition is reported:
• The Alarm LED on the display flashes
• The internal buzzer pulses
• The alarm event is stored in the event log
• The alarm message is transmitted to peripheral devices such as RDCMs and
ATM-Ls, if applicable
• The alarm message is communicated via the RS-232 ports, as applicable
• Point- or group-specific and general-alarm outputs will activate, including
previously-silenced outputs.
3-2.5.4.1 What to Do When an Alarm Occurs
Press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key to change the Alarm LED from flashing to
steady illumination and to silence the internal buzzer.
It will be necessary to press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key once for each device
in alarm if multiple unacknowledged alarm events are present. All alarm
acknowledgments are logged.
The display changes to indicate the next unacknowledged alarm event in the
case of multiple alarm events.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-69 December 2004


System Operations

The active alarms and acknowledged alarm-initiating devices can then be


manually displayed, in the format of Figure 3-10, in order of occurrence using
the <SCROLL> Key. A summary of the number of active alarm events will be
displayed as shown in Figure 3-11 at the conclusion of each manual scroll cycle.

Figure 3-11. Typical Message After Alarm Manual Scroll Cycle


3-2.5.4.2 Alarm Silencing
Press the <Silence> Key to de-activate any silenceable outputs such as NACs
and SLC-based signal or relay modules after all alarms have been
acknowledged. Outputs are made silenceable through the FENWALNET 6000
configuration program. The control unit will display the following message for
5 to 10 seconds.

OUTPUTS SILENCED

Figure 3-12. Outputs Silenced Message


You may then manually scroll through the list of active and acknowledged
alarm-initiating devices by using the <SCROLL> Key after the message in
Figure 3-12 is displayed. A summary of the number of active alarm events
will be displayed as shown in Figure 3-11 at the conclusion of each manual
scroll cycle.
The Silence LED will illuminate when the <Silence> Key is pressed after all
alarms have been acknowledged. A subsequent press of the <SILENCE> Key
will re-activate any outputs that were silenced if no new alarm events have been
reported since the outputs were silenced. The Silence LED will also go out. This
toggling capability will remain in effect until the control unit is reset.
A silence command that caused all silenceable outputs to de-activate will be
overridden by a subsequent alarm report. All silenced outputs associated with
the subsequent alarm-initiating device will reactivate, and the Silence LED will
go out. You will need to press the <SILENCE> Key again to de-activate any
active, silenceable outputs.
Note: There is a 10-second buffer period during which subsequent presses of
the <SILENCE> Key are intentionally ignored. A subsequent key press
will only be acted upon after at least 10 seconds have elapsed since the
previous key press.

December 2004 3-70 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.4.3 Non-Latching Operation


Some SmartOne alarm devices can be configured for non-latching operation.
Non-latching operation refers to the special way that Alarm Off messages from
initiating devices are processed by the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit.
Each SmartOne alarm-initiating device (such as a smoke detector) transmits an
Alarm On message when it detects a fire signature in excess of its configured
threshold value. An AI Monitor Module monitoring a normally-open contact
detects a contact closure from the contact.
The SmartOne automatic alarm-initiating devices and monitor modules also
transmit Alarm Off messages when the detected fire signature drops below the
configured threshold value and when the contact closure is removed,
respectively. The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit always displays every Alarm
On message, but will not display an Alarm Off message unless the alarm device
is configured for non-latching operation. Each Alarm Off message from a non-
latching initiating device is treated as a system event that requires operator
intervention.
3-2.5.4.4 FENWALNET 6000 Alarm-Off Messages
The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit will only display an Alarm Off message
from an alarm-initiating device such as a smoke detector if the device is
configured for non-latching operation.
The upper line of the LCD display shows the event by the device address, the
change of state, and the device type. The lower line indicates the up-to-40-
character message assigned to the alarm-initiating device using the
FENWALNET 6000 configuration program.

Alarm-Off Indication (Non-Latching Devices only)

Device Address 050 Device Type Reporting Alarm Off

050 ALARM OFF PHOTOELECTRIC


COMPUTER ROOM

Device-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-13. Typical Alarm Off Message


The following actions also occur when any Alarm Off condition is reported by a
non-latching, alarm-initiating device:
• The Alarm LED on the display flashes
• The internal buzzer pulses
• The Alarm Off event is stored in the event log
Note: All Alarm Off messages are logged, regardless of whether the initiating
device is configured for non-latching or latching operation.
• The Alarm Off message is transmitted to peripheral devices such as
RDCMs and ATM-Ls, if applicable
• The Alarm Off message is communicated via the RS-232 ports

P/N 06-236529-001 3-71 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.4.5 What to Do When an Alarm-Off Message is Displayed


Press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key to change the Alarm LED from flashing to
steady and to silence the internal buzzer.
It will be necessary to press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key once for each alarm
off report if multiple unacknowledged Alarm Off events are present. All Alarm
Off acknowledgments are logged. Each corresponding Alarm On message will
be removed from the list of active, manually scrolled alarm messages after its
Alarm Off message is acknowledged.
The display will show the following message if all the alarm devices are
configured for non-latching operation, each activated alarm device has
transmitted an Alarm Off message that has been acknowledged, and no releases
are being reported:

NO ACTIVE ALARMS REMAIN


PRESS RESET TO RETURN TO NORMAL

Figure 3-14. Message After All Alarm-Off Reports are Acknowledged


The system will then resume normal latching-alarm-event annunciation. You
may manually scroll through the list of active and acknowledged latching-alarm-
initiating devices using the <SCROLL> Key if both latching and non-latching
alarm reports have been received. They will be displayed using the format of
Figure 3-10. A summary of the number of active latching alarm events will be
displayed as shown in Figure 3-11 at the conclusion of each manual scroll cycle.
3-2.5.4.6 When to Use Non-Latching Initiating Devices
Use non-latching alarm-initiating devices to prevent an inadvertent release of an
extinguishing system as the result of a transitory event that can mimic a fire
signature such as an air-conditioning-system leak or the initial start-up of a
heating system in the fall. The real or mimicked fire signatures that trigger a
countdown to release for an extinguishing system must be present for the entire
countdown-delay period in order to release the extinguishing system when non-
latching alarm-initiating devices are used. The extinguishing-system release will
be aborted if a non-latching device reports an Alarm Off message prior to the
expiration of the countdown timer.
3-2.5.4.7 Alarm Display Limitation
The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit can display a maximum of 64 active
alarm messages by manually scrolling through them. All alarms in excess
of 64 will be processed by the Control Unit even though they are not
displayed, and all outputs will be activated as programmed in the Control
Unit’s application program.
The LCD will display the following message if a new alarm report is received and
the alarm-display limitation has been exceeded:

MORE THAN 64 ALARMS


PRESS SCROLL TO VIEW

Figure 3-15. Alarm Events Buffer Full Message for New Alarm Event

December 2004 3-72 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

The normal control unit actions will also occur when any non-displayed alarm
condition is reported. These actions include:
• Flashing Alarm LED on the display
• Pulsing internal buzzer
• Logging of the alarm event
• Transmittal of the buffer-full message to peripheral devices such as
RDCMs, if applicable
• Communication of the alarm message via the RS-232 ports
• Activation of point- or group-specific and general-alarm outputs,
including previously-silenced outputs.
Press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key to resume normal alarm-event manual scrolling.
The following message will appear at the end of each manual scroll cycle when
more than 64 alarm events are active:

MORE THAN 64 ALARMS


PRESS SCROLL TO VIEW

Figure 3-16. Alarm Events Buffer Full Message After Manual Scroll Cycle
3-2.5.4.8 How To Reset the Control Unit After an Alarm Condition
The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit will not reset and resume normal
operations unless it has received Alarm Off messages from all previously
alarmed initiating devices. This means, for example, that:
• All automatic initiating devices such as smoke detectors are measuring
obscuration levels below their programmed alarm thresholds
• All manual stations have been reset and are in non-activated positions
• Sprinkler system water has been shut off and all waterflow switches have
stopped reporting discharge conditions
Press the <RESET> Key to resume normal operations after all alarm-initiating
devices have transmitted Alarm Off messages.
Note: It is possible that one or more trouble and/or supervisory messages will
be reported after the system-reset operation is performed. For example,
a special extinguishing system may need to be recharged or a sprinkler
gate valve may be in an off-normal position. Servicing personnel must
take prompt action to restore the system to normal operating
conditions.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-73 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.5 SPECIAL ALARM CONDITIONS

Do not use the following special smoke-detector configurations for releasing applications.
WARNING

Two special alarm states are positive alarm sequence and alarm verification.
3-2.5.5.1 Positive Alarm Sequence
The Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) is designed to give on-site personnel time to
investigate a fire-alarm report from a smoke detector and to prevent an
evacuation signal from being generated in the event of a spurious fire-signature
detection or an inconsequential fire-alarm report. See Chapter 6 of NFPA 72,
National Fire Alarm Code, 2002 Edition, for further details. Refer to the
FENWALNET 6000 User's Programming Guide to configure a smoke detector
for PAS operation.
The PAS State occurs when the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit receives an
emergency signal from a smoke detector configured for PAS.
The upper line of the LCD display shows the event by the device address, the
change of state, and the device type. The lower line indicates the up-to-40-
character message assigned to the alarm-initiating device using the
FENWALNET 6000 configuration program.

PAS Indication On (Smoke Detectors only)


Device Type Reporting PAS On
Device Address 200

200 PAS ON PHOTOELECTRIC


FIRST FLOOR LIBRARY

Device-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-17. Typical PAS Message Display


The following actions also occur when any PAS event is reported:
• The internal buzzer pulses
• The PAS event is stored in the event log
• The PAS message is transmitted to peripheral devices such as RDCMs, if
applicable
• The PAS message is communicated via the RS-232 ports

December 2004 3-74 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.5.2 What to Do When PAS Occurs


You must press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key within 15 seconds of receipt of the
PAS report to prevent a PAS condition from changing to an alarm condition as
described in Paragraph 3-2.5.5.1. The internal buzzer will silence and the
display will change to the appearance in Figure 3-18 if the <ACKNOWLEDGE>
Key is pressed within 15 seconds of receipt of the PAS report. PAS
acknowledgments are logged.

PAS Indication On
(Smoke Detectors only)

Device Type Time Remaining to


Reporting PAS On PAS Expiration

Device Address 200

200 PAS ON PHOTOELECTRIC 60 SEC


FIRST FLOOR LIBRARY

Device-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-18. PAS Acknowledgment Message


The upper line of the LCD display shows the time remaining to investigate the
PAS report before the PAS event transitions to an alarm condition. The
investigation time will continually decrease in one-second intervals. The control
unit will return to Normal Operation if you press the <RESET> Key or the
smoke detector reports an Alarm Off message at any time prior to the expiration
of the investigation period. A PAS de-activation event is stored in the event log
if an Alarm Off message is reported.
3-2.5.5.3 Alarm Verification
Alarm verification allows a fire-alarm system to delay generating an evacuation
signal when an alarm report is received from a smoke detector. The fire-alarm
system will wait for a second alarm report from the smoke detector that issued
the initial alarm report or another alarm signal from any other alarm-initiating
device before it generates the evacuation signal. The fire-alarm system will
resume normal operations if it does not receive a second alarm report from the
smoke detector or another alarm signal within the user-defined alarm-
verification period. See Chapter 6 of NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code, 2002
Edition for details. Refer to the FENWALNET 6000 User's Programming Guide
to configure a smoke detector for alarm verification.
The Alarm Verification State occurs when the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit
receives an emergency signal from a smoke detector configured for alarm
verification.
The upper line of the LCD display shows the event by the device address, the
change of state, and the device type. The lower line indicates the up-to-40-
character message assigned to the alarm-initiating device using the
FENWALNET 6000 configuration program.
Alarm-Verification
Indication

Device Address 010 Device Type Reporting Alarm

010 ALARM VERIFY PHOTOELECTRIC


CONTROL ROOM

Device-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-19. Typical Alarm Verification Message Display

P/N 06-236529-001 3-75 December 2004


System Operations

The following actions also occur when an alarm verification is reported:


• The internal buzzer pulses
• The alarm verification event is stored in the event log
• The alarm verification message is transmitted to peripheral devices such
as RDCMs, if applicable
• The alarm verification message is communicated via the RS-232 ports
3-2.5.5.4 What to Do When Alarm Verification Occurs
Press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key to silence the internal buzzer. The display
will change to the appearance in Figure 3-20. Acknowledgments of alarm
verifications are logged.

Alarm-Verification Indication On (Smoke Detectors only)


Device Type Reporting
Alarm-Verification On
Time Remaining for
Alarm Verification
Device Address 010

010 ALARM VERIFY PHOTOELECTRIC 60 SEC


CONTROL ROOM

Device-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-20. Alarm Verification Acknowledgment Message


The upper line of the LCD display shows the verification time remaining to
receive an alarm confirmation signal from the smoke detector. The verification
time will continually decrease in one-second intervals. The control unit will
return to Normal Mode if the smoke detector does not reconfirm the alarm
condition or if no other alarm-initiating device reports at any time prior to the
expiration of the verification period. A verification off event is stored in the event
log if neither an alarm reconfirmation nor a secondary-alarm message
is reported.
3-2.5.6 SUPERVISORY STATE
The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit enters the Supervisory State when an initiating
event occurs such as a monitor module report of a low-air-pressure condition in a pre-
action-sprinkler system. It also occurs when any SLC-based initiating or control device,
or any control unit based output circuit, is isolated.
The upper line of the LCD display shows the supervisory event by the device address,
the state change, and the device type. The lower line indicates the up-to-40-character
message assigned to the supervisory device using the FENWALNET 6000 configuration
program.

Supervisory On Indication

Device Type
Device Address 070

070 SUPERVISORY ON MONITOR MODULE


FIFTH-FLOOR GATE VALVE

Device-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-21. Typical Supervisory Message Display

December 2004 3-76 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

The following actions also occur when any supervisory condition is reported:
• The Supervisory LED flashes
• The internal buzzer pulses
• The supervisory event is stored in the event log
• The supervisory message is transmitted to peripheral devices such as RDCMs
and ATM-Ls, if applicable
• The supervisory message is communicated via the RS-232 ports
• Point- or group-specific and general supervisory outputs will activate, including
previously-silenced outputs.
3-2.5.6.1 What to Do When a Supervisory Event Occurs
Press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key to change the Supervisory LED from
flashing to steady and to silence the internal buzzer.
It will be necessary to press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key once for each
supervisory event if multiple unacknowledged supervisory events are
present and the multiple-supervisory-event-acknowledgment option has
not been selected. See Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.33 to enable the multiple-
supervisory-event-acknowledgment option.
Each acknowledged supervisory event (or block of supervisory events when
multiple event acknowledgment is used) will disappear from the display after
acknowledgment. The display changes to indicate the next unacknowledged
supervisory event in the case of multiple supervisory events. The active
supervisory events can be manually displayed in order of occurrence using the
<SCROLL> Key at this time after all supervisory events have been
acknowledged. A summary of the number of active supervisory events will be
displayed as shown in Figure 3-22 at the conclusion of each manual scroll cycle.

Figure 3-22. Message After Manual Supervisory Scroll Cycle


A supervisory event that occurs after all previous supervisory events have been
acknowledged will re-initialize the Supervisory State as defined in
Paragraph 3-2.5.6.
3-2.5.6.2 How To Reset the Control Unit After a Supervisory Condition
Supervisory conditions are user configurable to be non-latching or latching.
There is no indication that a supervisory event has cleared when multiple,
acknowledged supervisory events are present regardless of whether the
supervisory event is configured for latching or non-latching operation. The only
indication will be that the supervisory event as depicted in Figure 3-21 has
disappeared from the set of manually scrolled events and that the total number
of supervisory events displayed in Figure 3-22 has decreased.
The system will automatically return to the Normal Mode when all of the
supervisory events have cleared if the monitor modules that reported the events
were configured to be non-latching, or if all isolated SLC devices and control-
unit-based circuits are restored to normal-operating condition.
Press the <RESET> switch to resume normal operations after a latching
supervisory event has cleared.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-77 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.7 PRE-ALARM STATE


The Pre-Alarm State occurs when a SmartOne automatic initiating device (such as a
smoke detector) senses a fire signature that is below its configured alarm-threshold
value but above a lower-threshold value called the “pre-alarm” threshold.
The upper line of the LCD display shows the pre-alarm event by the device address, the
change of state, and the device type. The lower line indicates the up-to-40-character
message assigned to the alarm device using the FENWALNET 6000 configuration
program.

Pre-Alarm-On Indication

Device Address 200 Device Type

200 PREALARM PHOTOELECTRIC


GROUND-FLOOR CONTROL ROOM

Device-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-23. Typical Pre-Alarm-Message Display


The following actions also occur when any pre-alarm condition is reported:
• The Pre-Alarm LED flashes
• The internal buzzer pulses
• The pre-alarm event is stored in the event log
• The pre-alarm message is transmitted to peripheral devices such as RDCMs and
ATM-Ls, if applicable
• The pre-alarm message is communicated via the RS-232 ports
• Point- or group-specific and general pre-alarm outputs will activate, including
previously-silenced outputs.

December 2004 3-78 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.7.1 What to Do When a Pre-Alarm Occurs


Press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key to change the Pre-Alarm LED from flashing
to steady illumination and to silence the internal buzzer. It will be necessary to
press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key more than once to change the Pre-Alarm
LED from flashing to steady illumination and to silence the internal buzzer if
multiple unacknowledged pre-alarm events are present. All pre-alarm
acknowledgments are logged.
The display changes to indicate the next unacknowledged pre-alarm event in the
case of multiple pre-alarm events.
The system will then continue pre-alarm-event annunciation. You may manually
scroll through the list of active and acknowledged pre-alarm-initiating devices
in order of occurrence by using the <SCROLL> Key. They will be displayed
using the format of Figure 3-23.
3-2.5.7.2 Pre-Alarm Silencing
Press the <SILENCE> Key to de-activate any silenceable outputs such as
control unit-based notification-appliance circuits and SLC-based signal or relay
modules after all pre-alarms have been acknowledged. Outputs are made
silenceable through the FENWALNET 6000 configuration program. The control
unit will display the following message for 5 to 10 seconds:

OUTPUTS SILENCED

Figure 3-24. Outputs-Silenced Message


You may then manually scroll through the list of active and acknowledged
pre-alarm-initiating devices after the outputs silenced message in
Figure 3-24 is displayed.
The Silence LED will illuminate when the <SILENCE> Key is pressed after all
pre-alarm events have been acknowledged. A subsequent press of the
<SILENCE> Key will re-activate any outputs that were silenced if no new pre-
alarm events were reported. The Silence LED will also go out. This toggling
capability will remain in effect until the control unit is reset.
A silence command that caused all silenceable outputs to de-activate will be
overridden by a subsequent pre-alarm report. All silenced outputs associated
with the subsequent pre-alarm initiating device will reactivate, and the Silence
LED will go out. The <SILENCE> Key must be pressed again to de-activate any
active, silenceable outputs.
3-2.5.7.3 How to Reset the Control Unit After a Pre-Alarm Condition
The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit resumes normal operations when it
receives "Pre-Alarm Off" messages from all previously-alarmed automatic
initiating devices unless one or more latching outputs such a control unit based
notification appliance circuit has been turned on. This mode of operation
ensues regardless of whether the automatic alarm-initiating devices are
configured for latching or non-latching operation.
Press the <RESET> switch to resume normal operations if latching outputs
have been activated.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-79 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.8 CONCURRENT STATES


It is possible for the FENWALNET 6000 system to be in more than one of the event-
driven, Off-Normal Mode states concurrently. In general, any new event, regardless of
its type, is prioritized for immediate display, and the control unit's application program
runs to activate the outputs, if any, associated with the new event. The FENWALNET
6000's hierarchy for displaying events will determine whether the details associated
with the new event will continue to be displayed after acknowledgment or whether its
display will be suppressed due to the presence of other higher-priority events.
The general hierarchy for the display of events is as follows:
• Alarm
• Pre-Alarm
• Supervisory and Trouble
3-2.5.8.1 Alarm Events
An alarm event is a signal indicating an emergency situation that requires an
immediate response. However, there are varying degrees of alarm signals,
depending on whether the system’s primary objective is property protection and
mission continuity or whether it is occupant notification and building
evacuation.
1. Property Protection/Mission Continuity Alarm Events
A property-protection/mission continuity system is usually installed to
suppress a fire in the area that it is protecting. Waterless fire-suppression
systems typically progress through multiple, sequential alarm states
before the extinguishing system is discharged. The automatic detection
system is either crossed-zoned or arranged in a counting zone to ensure
that a flaming fire is present at the time of extinguishing-system discharge
and for added reliability.
The typical alarm stages of a FENWALNET 6000 System designed for
property protection/mission continuity are summarized in Table 3-7.
Note: There must be at least two detectors in the protected area when either
crossed-zoned or counting-zone automatic detection is used.

December 2004 3-80 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

Table 3-7. Progressive Alarm States of a FENWALNET 6000 System


Designed for Property Protection/Mission Continuity

State When Occurs

Pre-Alarm State The pre-alarm state occurs when any automatic detector that is a member of a crossed-zoned or
counting-zone detection system issues an alarm report. The pre-alarm state for a property-
protection/mission-continuity system with waterless fire suppression typically refers to the receipt of
an alarm signal from a spot-type smoke detector or an HSSD. The pre-alarm state described in
Paragraph 3-2.5.7 dealt with essentially a warning signal from an automatic detector that the fire
signature at a specific location had exceeded a user-configurable, low-level threshold value. That pre-
alarm signal did not create an actual alarm.
The pre-alarm state discussed here should not be confused with the pre-alarm state
discussed in Paragraph 3-2.5.7.
The pre-alarm state must be annunciated by distinctive public-mode notification.
Pre-Release State The pre-release state occurs when two automatic detectors (one detector from each of the two
crossed zones or any two detectors in a counting zone) issue an alarm report. The discharge
criterion for the waterless fire-suppression system is attained when the pre-release state occurs.
The pre-release state is also referred to as the countdown state because it typically triggers a
time-delay period that precedes the discharge of the waterless fire-suppression system.
The pre-release state must be annunciated by public-mode notification different from the pre-
alarm state public notification mode.
Release State The release state occurs when the waterless fire-suppression system discharges at the
conclusion of the time-delay period.
The release state can also be triggered without a time delay by a manual-release station. It is
also common practice to trigger a pre-action-sprinkler system concurrently with the discharge
of the waterless suppression system.
The release state must be annunciated by public-mode notification different from both the pre-
alarm-state and pre-release-state public notification modes.
Abort State The abort state occurs when an abort switch is manually activated to interrupt or prevent the
start of the countdown timer whose expiration will trigger the discharge of the waterless fire-
suppression system.

2. Occupant Notification/Building-Evacuation Alarm Events


An occupant-notification/building-evacuation system is usually installed
as required by fire codes to warn the occupants of a building to evacuate
because of a fire. This system enters the alarm state when devices such as
an automatic detector, a manual-alarm station, or a waterflow switch
reports as an alarm event. The FENWALNET 6000 System uses temporal-
coded horns and strobes (or other method of non-voice-messaging, public
notification acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction) to notify the
occupants to evacuate the building.
An occupant-notification/building-evacuation system has two sub-alarm
states that are designed to delay the building-evacuation signals or to
prevent a transient, non-fire signature from activating the building-
evacuation signals. These two sub-alarm states are Positive-Alarm
Sequence and Alarm Verification, described previously.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-81 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.8.2 Hierarchy for Display of Concurrent Events


The hierarchy for the display of concurrent events, from highest to lowest
priority, is as follows:

Table 3-8. Priority Levels for Different Types of Concurrent Events

Priority Level Types of Events

1 Countdown-to-Release Events
2 Release, Alarm, Abort, and PAS-Countdown Events
3 Pre-Alarm Events (per Paragraph 3-2.5.7)
4 Alarm-Verification-Countdown Events
5 Supervisory and Trouble Events

Lower-level events will not be automatically displayed if higher-level events are


active.
3-2.5.8.3 How Concurrent Events Are Displayed
The information shown on the FENWALNET 6000 display will change if the
system is in more than one state concurrently.
1. Level-1 Event Display
The upper line of the LCD display shows the time to release for the first
suppression zone that has begun to count down after you acknowledge the
alarm event (or events) that have triggered the countdown. The time to
release will continually decrease in one-second intervals until the
expiration of the time-delay period. The lower line indicates the numbers
of concurrently-active events for the following Level-1 and Level-2 event
types:
– Discharges
– Countdowns to Release
– Aborts
– Alarms
– PAS Countdowns in Progress
Level-2 and lower-level events will not appear on the display as long as any
Level-1 event is active and is in process.
Figure 3-25 shows the appearance of the display when a suppression zone
has begun to count down.

Time Remaining Until Release

RELEASE IN 30 SEC (PRESS SCROLL TO VIEW)


DIS 00 CNTDN 01 ABT 00 ALM 02 PAS 00

No. of PAS Countdowns in Progress

No. of Alarms
No. of Activated Abort Stations
No. of Countdowns to Release in Progress
No. of Extinguishing-System Discharges

Figure 3-25. Typical Countdown-to-Release Display

December 2004 3-82 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

The display will show the following message when an extinguishing


system has been released:

Release Message
Release Circuit

AR2 SYSTEM RELEASE


POWER ROOM

Zone-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-26. Typical Release Message


Press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key when the message in Figure 3-26
appears to silence the buzzer. The display will change as shown in Figure
3-27. You may then manually scroll the display using the <SCROLL> Key
to show any other suppression zones (successively by order of
occurrence, if applicable) that have begun to count down after the release
in the first suppression zone. Otherwise, you may manually scroll the
display to show the completed Level-1 events and active Level-2 events
which will appear as shown in Figure 3-29.

Alarm Indication

Device Address 010 Device Type Reporting Alarm

010 ALARM ON PHOTOELECTRIC (SCROLLTOVIEW)


DIS 01 CNTDN 00 ABT 00 ALM 02 PAS 00
No. of PAS
Countdowns in Progress
No. of Alarms
No. of Activated Abort Stations

No. of Countdowns to Release in Progress

No. of Extinguishing-System Releases

Figure 3-27. Typical Display after Acknowledgment of Release Message


A new event will not automatically override the appearance of the display
when a countdown to release is in progress. The appropriate LED on the
display will flash and the buzzer will sound when any new system event is
reported, and the new event will be logged. The new event will only be
displayed when the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key is pressed.

P/N 06-236529-001 3-83 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.8.4 What to Do When a Level-1 Message is Displayed


Press the <SCROLL> Key to display the details about the impending special
extinguishing system release. There is only the time remaining in the
countdown to abort and halt the extinguishing-system release. A successful
abort-switch activation will display the following message:

Abort-On Indication
Device Address 205 Device Type

205 ABORT ON ABORT STATION


GROUND-FLOOR CONTROL ROOM

Device-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-28. Typical Display After Abort-Switch Operation


Press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> key when the message in Figure 3-28 appears to
silence the buzzer.
Press the <SCROLL> Key to display the information for the next highest-
priority and subsequent events. The display will show the 1st event or "More
than 64 Alarms" when all of current Level-2 events have been manually
displayed. The upper line of the display will revert to showing the highest-
priority event approximately 5 seconds after the last press of the <SCROLL>
Key. You may then manually scroll the display among the active Level-2 events.
The appearance of the display when manually scrolling through the completed
Level-1 and active Level-2 events is shown in Figure 3-29.

Alarm Indication
Device Address 010 Device Type Reporting Alarm

010 ALARM ON MANUAL STATION


COMPUTER ROOM

Device-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-29. Typical Display When Manually Scrolling Through Level-1/-2 Events
3-2.5.8.5 Level-2 Event Display
The upper line of the LCD display shows the activated device or circuit address,
the change of state, and the device type that reported the event or the release
circuit that has activated. The lower line indicates the following numbers of
active or completed Level-1 events and active Level-2 events:
• Discharges
• Countdowns to Release
• Aborts
• Alarms
• PAS Countdowns in Progress
Level-3 and lower-level events will not appear on the display as long as any
Level-2 event is active.
Figure 3-30 shows the appearance of the display when more than one type of
Level-2 event is active.

December 2004 3-84 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

Alarm Indication

Device Address 010 Device Type Reporting Alarm

010 ALARM ON PHOTOELECTRIC


DIS 00 CNTDN 00 ABT 01 ALM 02 PAS 00

No. of PAS Countdowns


in Progress
No. of Alarms

No. of Activated Abort Stations

No. of Countdowns to Release in Progress

No. of Extinguishing-System Releases

Figure 3-30. Typical Multiple Level-2 Event-Type Display


You may manually scroll the display among the active Level-2 events and
completed Level-1 events by using the <SCROLL> Key.
3-2.5.8.6 What to Do When Level-2 Messages are Displayed
Press the <SCROLL> Key to display the information for the highest-priority
and subsequent events. The display will show the 1st event or "More than 64
Alarms" when all of current Level-2 and completed Level-1 events have been
manually displayed. The upper line of the display will revert to showing the
highest-priority event approximately 5 seconds after the last press of the
<SCROLL> Key. You may then manually scroll the display among the active
Level-2 and completed Level-1 events.
The appearance of the display when manually scrolling through the active
Level-2 events is shown in Figure 3-31.

Alarm Indication

Device Address 010 Device Type Reporting Alarm

010 ALARM ON MANUAL STATION


COMPUTER ROOM

Device-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-31. Typical Display When Manually Scrolling Through Level-2 Events

P/N 06-236529-001 3-85 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.5.8.7 Level-3 and Lower-Level Event Display


The upper line of the LCD display shows the activated device or circuit address,
the change of state, and the device or circuit type that reported the event. The
lower line indicates the numbers of concurrently-active events for the following
Level-3 through Level-5 event types:
• Pre-Alarms
• Alarm-Verification Countdowns
• Supervisory Events
• Troubles
Figure 3-32 shows the appearance of the display when more than one type of
Level-3 through Level-5 event is active.
Alarm Indication

Device Address 010 Device Type Reporting Alarm

010 VERIFY ON PHOTOELECTRIC (SCROLLTOVIEW)


PREALM 00 AVCNTDN 01 SPV 00 TBL 00

No. of Troubles
No. of Supervisory Events
No. of Alarm-Verification Countdowns
No. of Pre-Alarms

Figure 3-32. Typical Multiple Lower-Level Event Display


You may manually scroll the display among the active lower-level events,
according to the priority of events as shown in Figure 3-32, by using the
<SCROLL> Key. Only Level-3 events will scroll if present. Level-4 events scroll
if there are no Level-3 events. Supervisory and trouble events scroll if there are
no active pre-alarms or alarm verifications.
3-2.5.8.8 What to Do When Level-3 and Lower-Level Messages are Displayed
Press the <SCROLL> Key to display the information for the highest-priority and
subsequent events. The display will show 1st Event when all of current Level-3 and
lower-level events have been manually displayed. The upper line of the display will
revert to showing the highest-priority event approximately 5 seconds after the last
press of the <SCROLL> Key. You may then manually scroll the display among the
active Level-3 through Level-5 events.
The appearance of the display when manually scrolling through the currently-
active Level-3 and lower-level events is shown in Figure 3-33.
Type of Fault

Device Address 062 Device Type with Fault

062 OPEN ON THERMAL


FIRST FLOOR POWER ROOM

Device-Specific
Custom Message

Figure 3-33. Typical Level-3 and Lower-Level Events Display

December 2004 3-86 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

3-2.5.8.9 Level-3 Display Limitations


The FENWALNET 6000 can display a maximum of 300 active trouble,
supervisory, pre-alarm, and alarm-verification messages. However, new events
in excess of the 300 active reports will be processed by the control unit, and all
outputs associated with the 300th (or higher) event will be activated as
programmed in the control unit's application program.
The LCD will show the following message if a new trouble, supervisory, pre-
alarm, or alarm-verification report is received and the display limitation has
been exceeded:

> 300 PREALMS/AVCTNDNS/TBLS/SPVS


PRESS SCROLL TO VIEW

Figure 3-34. Lower-Level-Events-Buffer-Full Message for New Event


The normal control unit actions will occur when any non-displayed event is
reported. These actions include:
• Flashing of the appropriate LED
• Pulsing of the internal buzzer
• Logging of the event
• Transmittal of the buffer-full message to peripheral devices such as
RDCMs, if applicable
• Communication of the event via RS-232 ports
• Activation of point- or group-specific and general state outputs, including
previously-silenced outputs
Press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key to resume normal manual concurrent-event
scrolling. The following message will be displayed at the end of each manual
scroll cycle when more than 300 Level-3 and lower-level events are active:

> 300 PREALMS/AVCNTDNS/TBLS/SPVS


PRESS SCROLL TO VIEW

Figure 3-35. Lower Level Events Buffer Full Message After Manual Scroll Cycle

P/N 06-236529-001 3-87 December 2004


System Operations

3-2.6 System Start-Up

Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable while the control unit is powering up on
system startup or is initializing after a new configuration upload.
CAUTION

The following paragraphs describe system start-up procedures following a successful


installation.
3-2.6.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
Ensure that the following tasks were successfully completed:
• The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit is securely mounted in a clean and dry area
that has a normal range of environmental temperatures.
• The power supply unit has been configured correctly for the AC supply voltage.
• All field wiring has been checked for continuity, earth grounds, and short circuits.
Wiring resistance and capacitance values have been measured and recorded,
where appropriate.
• All SLC-based initiating devices and relay/control modules are electronically
addressed, or will be addressed shortly after the control unit is powered up. SLC
wiring is not connected to the control unit.
• The initiating circuits for all AI Monitor Modules are terminated with 10 k Ohms
end-of-line resistors.
• Peripheral devices such as RDCMs and ATMs have their address switches
correctly set.
• Field wiring for all control unit-based NACs is terminated with 10 kOhm end-of-
line resistors.
• All control heads for special-extinguishing systems, if used, are removed from the
agent storage containers.
• All initiator circuits have been replaced by simulated loads.
• Pre-Action/deluge solenoids are removed from the valves that control the
distribution of water to the sprinkler heads.
3-2.6.2 INITIAL POWER-UP AND CONTROL-UNIT CHECKOUT
The FENWALNET 6000 power-up procedure is as follows:
1. Close the circuit breaker to apply AC power to the control unit. Verify that the
green "Power On" LED illuminates and the display shows this message for
approximately 15 seconds:

SYSTEM STARTUP BOOT VERSION 1.0.0

Figure 3-36. Initial Power-Up Message


2. Confirm that the yellow Trouble LED is lit and that the following message appears
for 10 to 20 seconds.

SYSTEM INITIALIZING
FENWALNET 6000 VER 1.0.0/1.0.0

Figure 3-37. Initialization Message


3. Connect the standby batteries as shown in Figure 2-9. The display will indicate
the following messages:

December 2004 3-88 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

DATE/TIME MUST BE SET TROUBLE ON


NORMAL OPERATION TEST

SLC NOT MONITORING ON


NORMAL OPERATION TEST

002 ACTIVE TROUBLES REMAIN


PRESS SCROLL TO VIEW

Figure 3-38. Boot-Up Message


Press the <ACKNOWLEDGE> Key to silence the buzzer and change the Trouble
LED from flashing to steady illumination.
These messages will scroll for several minutes.
Proceed to Step 4 after the “SLC Not Monitoring On” message disappears and the
number of active troubles changes from 002 to 001.
4. Set the time and date as follows:
a. Press the 0 Key. This display will show this message:

PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD


* * * * * *

Figure 3-39. Password Prompt


b. Press the default Level-1 Password (973480) keys and press the
<Enter> Key. The top-level menu will appear:

1: ISOLATE 2: LIST
3: SET 4: TEST

Figure 3-40. Top-Level Menu Selections


c. Press the 3 Key to select "SET"

1: TIME/DATE 2: PORT CONTROL


3: SLC DEVICES SCROLL FOR MORE

Figure 3-41. Set Menu


d. Press the 1 Key to select "TIME/DATE"

1: SET TIME 2: SET DATE


3: BATTERY

Figure 3-42. Time/Date Sub-Menu


e. Press the 1 Key again to select "SET TIME"

1: AM/PM 2: MILITARY

Figure 3-43. Sub-Menu for Time-Display Format


f. Press the 1 Key again to select "AM/PM" format

P/N 06-236529-001 3-89 December 2004


System Operations

SET TIME (AM/PM)


ENTER THE TIME *_:_ _ (HH:MM)

Figure 3-44. Sub-Menu to Enter Current Time


g. Enter the time (HH = hours, 0-12; MM = minutes, 0-59) using the digits
keys. Press the <Enter> Key to finish your entry.
h. Press the 1 Key for AM or the 2 Key for PM as indicated below, and then
press the <Enter> Key to enter your selection:

SET TIME (AM/PM)


1: AM 2: PM *

Figure 3-45. Sub-Menu to Complete Current-Time Entry


The display will return to the sub-menu below when you press the
<BACKSPACE> Key:

1: SET TIME 2: SET DATE


3: BATTERY

Figure 3-46. Time/Date Sub-Menu


i. Press the 2 Key to select "SET DATE"

SET DATE
ENTER THE DATE *_-_ _-_ _ (MM-DD-YY)

Figure 3-47. Sub-Menu to Enter Current Date


j. Enter the date (MM = month, 0-12; DD = day, 0-31, YY = year, 00-99) using
the digits keys.
k. Press the <ENTER> Key to finish your entry.
5. Press the <BACKSPACE> Key three times to exit from the menu operating state.
Confirm that no new trouble messages have appeared on the display.
6. Remove all power from the control unit by disconnecting the standby battery first
and then disconnecting the AC power in anticipation of initially configuring the
signaling line circuit.
Note: It will be necessary to enter the date and time each time that the FENWALNET
6000 Control Unit is completely powered down.
3-2.6.3 INITIAL SIGNALING-LINE-CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION
Note: The following procedure assumes that all SmartOne devices have been
addressed with the Handheld Programmer or via the FENWALNET 6000
keypad. Refer to Appendix D to address SmartOne devices through the
Handheld Programmer or to Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.6 to address SmartOne
devices via the FENWALNET 6000 control unit’s keypad.
Use this procedure to initially configure and check the number of SmartOne devices
connected to the SLC.
1. Connect the wiring for the SLC to Terminal Block TB1. Refer to Figure 1-3. See
also Figures 2-12, 2-15, and 2-16 for typical SLC wiring.
2. Power the control unit, and set the time and date, using the procedure outlined
in Paragraph 3-2.6.2.
3. All of the SmartOne devices connected to the SLC will report a not-registered
trouble message similar to the message shown in Figure 3-48:

December 2004 3-90 P/N 06-236529-001


System Operations

Trouble Not-Registered Indication

Device Type Not Known


Device Address 205
at This Time

205 NOT REGISTERED ON UNKNOWN TYPE


UNUSED SLC DEVICE

Figure 3-48. Typical Device Not Registered Message


4. Wait for all of the device-not-registered troubles to report. Press the
<ACKNOWLEDGE> Key one or more times to silence the control unit buzzer.
5. Confirm that no more trouble messages have been reported.
6. Record the number of currently-active troubles. The number of troubles should
be equal to the number of SmartOne devices connected to the SLC.
7. Run the AutoLearn Routine as follows:
a. Press the 0 Key. This display will show this message:

PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD


* * * * * *

Figure 3-49. Password Prompt


b. Press the default Level-2 Password keys (186591) and then press the
<Enter> Key. The top-level menu selections will be displayed:

1: ISOLATE 2: LIST
3: SET 4: TEST

Figure 3-50. Top-Level Menu Selections


c. Press the 3 Key to select "SET"

1: TIME/DATE 2: PORT CONTROL


3: SLC DEVICES SCROLL FOR MORE

Figure 3-51. Set Menu


d. Press the <SCROLL> Key and then the 4 Key to select "PROGRAMMING"

4: PROGRAMMING 5: GLOBALS
6: NETWORK (FUTURE) SCROLL FOR MORE

Figure 3-52. Additional Set-Menu Selections


e. Press 3 to select "AUTOLEARN"

1: DAY/NIGHT 2: PASSWORDS
3: AUTOLEARN SCROLL FOR MORE

Figure 3-53. Programming Sub-Menu


Figure 3-54 shows a typical message that displays when the AutoLearn
routine is running.

AUTO-LEARNING DEVICE ON SLC


AUTO-LEARNING DEVICE 031

Figure 3-54. Typical Auto-Learn In-Process Display

P/N 06-236529-001 3-91 December 2004


System Operations

The AutoLearn Routine will register and assign a default operating


configuration to each device on the SLC. Refer to Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.24 for
a detailed description of the AutoLearn Routine.
f. The control unit will display the following message when the AutoLearn
Routine is finished.

AUTO-LEARNING DEVICES ON SLC


REGISTERED XXX DEVICES ON SLC

Figure 3-55. Typical Auto-Learn Complete Display


g. Press the <Backspace> Key as required to exit from the menu operating
mode. Wait until the “Initializing Configuration Message” disappears from
the display. Confirm that no new trouble messages have appeared on the
display.
The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit is now ready for site-specific programming.
3-2.6.4 SITE-SPECIFIC PROGRAMMING
Each FENWALNET 6000 System must be uniquely configured for the specific end-user
application. System configuration involves assigning an address and operating
characteristics to each SmartOne initiating, relay, or control device. It also involves
defining what initiating events or combinations of initiating events will activate the
various control unit-based output circuits and SLC-based relay and control devices. A
site-specific application program can be created in the following two ways.
3-2.6.4.1 System Configuration via the Auto-Setup Routine
The Auto-Setup Routine sets operating parameters for SLC-based devices by
the combination of the device's type and address on the SLC. It assigns fixed
activation sequences for each control unit-based output circuit and each SLC-
based relay and control device by specific-initiating-device report and
combinations-of-initiating-device reports.
See Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.25 for a complete discussion of system configuration
through the Auto-Setup Routine.
3-2.6.4.2 System Configuration via the FCS Configuration Program
You can also configure the FENWALNET 6000 System via the FCS-6000
Configuration Program for individual site-specific applications. The FCS-6000
Configuration Program allows you to set the operating parameters for the
SmartOne initiating devices and to create activation sequences for each control
unit-based output circuit and each SLC-based relay and control device by
specific-initiating-device report and combinations-of-initiating-device reports.
Refer to the FENWALNET 6000 Programming Guide for an explanation of
system configuration through the FCS-6000 Configuration Program.

December 2004 3-92 P/N 06-236529-001


Inspection, Testing and Maintenance

CHAPTER 4
INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

4-1 SCHEDULED SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The FENWALNET 6000 System must be inspected, tested and maintained in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA 72 (2002), Chapter 10, or in accordance with the inspection, testing and
maintenance schedule mandated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

Follow the required inspection, testing, and maintenance procedures for the associated extinguishing
system(s) as directed by the manufacturer and by the standards and codes that apply to those systems.

Do not attempt any testing or maintenance of the FENWALNET 6000 System until
you have:
WARNING
• Isolated all releasing outputs via the Isolate function.
• Physically disconnected the wiring to initiator assemblies (if used) from the release-
circuit terminals, shorted the leads together, and wrapped the leads in insulating tape
• Physically disconnected all control heads (if used) from their associated agent-storage-
container discharge valves
• Physically disconnected the wiring to solenoid valves (if used) for pre-action/deluge
sprinkler systems
• Ensured that emergency operations controlled by this system such as facility power
shutoff are bypassed
• Notified personnel in the facility and at off-premises monitoring locations that
you are working on the system and that you will inform them when system
servicing has ended.

4-2 SEMI-ANNUAL AND ANNUAL TESTING

Perform the following tests as part of each semi-annual or annual system inspection:

4-2.1 Lamp Test

Test the LEDs on the control unit's display by using the procedure in Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.14.
Replace the display's membrane if any LED fails to illuminate.

4-2.2 Battery Test

Test the standby batteries by using the procedure in Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.7. Replace all
batteries if either the charging voltage or current do not fall within the specified ranges.

Replace batteries every three years, or more frequently as recommended by the battery
manufacturer. Fenwal provides the following batteries:

Part Number Capacity (AH)


06-115915-047 12
06-115915-046 17
89-100052-001 35

P/N 06-236529-001 4-1 December 2004


Inspection, Testing and Maintenance

4-2.3 Initiating-Devices Test

The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit automatically tests all of the initiating devices connected
to the signaling line circuit on a daily basis.

You should re-test the initiating devices by using the procedure in Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.1.
Investigate any "Device-Failed" messages and replace any defective initiating devices as
appropriate.

4-2.4 Walk Test

Confirm acceptable fire-signature-entry characteristics for all automatic initiating devices by


using the procedure in either Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.2 or Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.3. Use these
procedures to confirm that all monitor modules are also working correctly.

4-3 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

Verify that the system continues to operate in accordance with its approved sequence of
operation. Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2 show a typical sequence of operation for a waterless fire-
suppression system.
Note: These figures are for example only. Every system is unique and requires its own approved
sequence of operation.

December 2004 4-2 P/N 06-236529-001


NAC 2
NAC 1

Relay 3
Relay 2
Relay 1

Trouble
Combo 2
Combo 1

Release 2
Release 1

Response)
Trouble Relay

Abort Station
Control Modules
Monitor Modules

Any Condition
Waterflow Switch
Control-Unit Outputs

P/N 06-236529-001
A = Activate Output
Ionization Detectors
SLC Device Addresses

Auxiliary Supervisory
Photoelectric Detectors

D = De-Activate Output
Power Room (Zone 2)
Power Room (Zone 2)
Power Room (Zone 2)
Power Room (Zone 2)
Power Room (Zone 2)
Power Room (Zone 2)
Sprinkle Tamper Switch
One Area Smoke Detector

Low Air (Pre Action Sys)


Head-End Room (Zone 1)

Two Area Smoke Detectors


Two Area Smoke Detectors

Head-End Room (Zone 1)


Head-End Room (Zone 1)
Head-End Room (Zone 1)
Manual Station (Immediate
Head-End Room (Zone 1)
Head-End Room (Zone 1)
Head-End Room (Zone 1)

Low FM-200 Pressure Sw.


(30-Sec. Delayed Response)
Alarm (Immediate Response)
Sequence of Operation
Photoelectric Detectors

1-5
Device/Circuit Assignments

Room-of-Origin
Alarms/Actions Ionization Detectors

6-10
Activate/De-Activate Manual Release Stations

A
A

D
D
D
D
Horns @ 60 BPM

Activate/De-Activate Abort Switches

A
A

D
D
D
D
Horns @ 120 BPM
11-12 13-14

X
Activate/De-Activate Audible NAC

A
A
A
A
A
Temporal-Coded Horns
X Visible NAC
Activate/De-Activate

A
A
A
A
A
X
Strobes Waterless Extinguishing System Release Circuit
X
Pre-Action-Sprinkler Release Circuit
Activate Waterless

A
A
A
A
Extinguishing System
Power Room (Zone 2)
Interrupt Impending Water-

A
A
less System Discharge Photoelectric Detectors
15-18

4-3
Open Pre-Action-Sprinkler

A
A
A
A
Valve Ionization Detectors
19-21

Facility Equipment Manual Release Stations


22

Interlocks
Abort Switches
23

A
A
A
A
HVAC Shutdown
X

Audible NAC
X

Visible NAC

Figure 4-2. Sequence of Operation


A
A
A
A
Power Shutoff
Figure 4-1. Device/Circuit Assignments
X

Waterless Extinguishing System Release Circuit


Off-Premises Reports
X

Pre-Action-Sprinkler Release Circuit

Major Alarm to Central Facility Equipment Interlocks

A
A
Station
HVAC Shutdown
24

Critical Alarm to Central

A
A
A
A
Power Shutoff
25

Station

Waterflow Alarm to Central Off-Premises Reports


A

Station
X

Major Alarm to Central Station


Pre-Action-Valve to Central

A
A
A
A
X

Critical Alarm to Central Station


Station
Waterflow Alarm to Central Station
26

Supervisory to Central

A
A
A
A

Station Pre-Action-Valve to Central Station


27

Supervisory to Central Station

A
Trouble to Central Station
X

Trouble to Central Station


Inspection, Testing and Maintenance

December 2004
Inspection, Testing and Maintenance

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

December 2004 4-4 P/N 06-236529-001


Troubleshooting

CHAPTER 5
TROUBLESHOOTING

5-1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter lists all the error messages, their probable causes, and suggested procedures to return
the FENWALNET 6000 System to proper operating condition.

Do not attempt any of the corrective actions listed in this chapter until you have:
WARNING • Physically disconnected the wiring to initiator assemblies (if used) from the release-
circuit terminals, shorted the leads together, and wrapped the leads in insulating tape
• Physically disconnected all control heads (if used) from their associated agent storage
container discharge valves
• Physically disconnected the wiring to solenoid valves (if used) for pre-action/deluge-
sprinkler systems
• Ensured that emergency operations controlled by this system such as facility power
shutoff are bypassed
• Notified personnel in the facility and at off-premises monitoring locations that
you are working on the system and that you will inform them when system
servicing has ended.

Table 5-1. General System Events

General System Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

AC Supply Fault On Loss or degradation of primary power • Notify commercial light and power
from commercial light and power company of loss of service.
company. Message will appear if AC • Check connections to main circuit board
supply voltage drops to 85% or less of TB13. Use voltmeter to check for nominal
the normal operating voltage. 120/240 Vac at TB13.
Accompanied by message "System • Check for proper setting of printed-circuit-
Changed Over to Battery Power" if board AC Selection Switch. Refer to
standby battery used. Figure 2-8
• Remove secondary and primary power.
Label and disconnect all field wiring.
Caution:
Disconnect all electrical control heads and
short together and tape wiring to initiators
(if applicable)
• Ensure AC Selector Switch on power
supply is correctly set for line voltage.
Refer to Figure 2-5
• Re-install printed-circuit board, connect
field wiring, and apply primary and
secondary power if incorrect AC Selector-
Switch setting. Perform functional tests as
necessary

P/N 06-236529-001 5-1 December 2004


Troubleshooting

Table 5-1. General System Events (Continued)

General System Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

Battery Charging Fault On Failure of the battery-supervision • Check battery connections to main circuit
circuitry board TB3. Refer to Figure 2-9.
• Disconnect battery leads from main circuit
board TB3 and use digital volt-ohm meter
to measure battery open-circuit voltage.
Replace batteries if open-circuit voltage is
less than 19.5 Vdc.
• Replace the power supply assembly. See
Figure 2-4
• Replace printed-circuit board. See
Figure 2-6
Battery Disconnected Faulty battery connection • Check battery connections to main circuit
Fault On board TB3. Refer to Figure 2-9.
Note: Battery disconnected-fault • Disconnect battery leads from main circuit
messages do not disappear immediately board TB3 and use digital volt-ohm meter
when corrected. The control unit only to measure battery open-circuit voltage.
rechecks the battery connection once Replace batteries if open-circuit voltage is
per minute. less than 19.5 Vdc.
Configuration Memory Internal software fault • Re-upload applications program
Checksum Failure • Re-test the system for proper functionality
Configuration Memory Faulty upload of applications program • Re-upload applications program if
Write Failure or improper execution of a configuration message occurs after configuration upload
change via the menu system • Re-execute configuration change via menu
operation if message appears after menu
operation
Control Unit Ground Fault Low impedance path between negative • Continuously monitor DC voltage between
-Vdc ON field conductor and earth ground. earth-ground stud on left side of back box
Normal earth-ground offset voltage is and main circuit board TB2-1. Voltage
6.6 Vdc (nom.) relative to system should be 6.6 (nom.) Vdc. Earth ground is
common (e.g., main circuit board TB2-1 positive relative to system common.
or TB2-3). • Remove field circuits one at a time until
earth-ground offset voltage restores to 6.6
(nom.) Vdc.
• Check for connections to earth ground on
field circuit whose removal restored
proper earth-ground offset voltage.
Control Unit Ground Fault Low impedance path between positive • Continuously monitor DC voltage between
+Vdc On field conductor and earth ground. earth-ground stud on left side of back box
Normal earth-ground offset voltage is and main circuit board TB2-1. Voltage
6.6 (nom.) Vdc relative to system should be 6.6 (nom.) Vdc. Earth ground is
common (e.g., main circuit board TB2-1 positive relative to system common.
or TB2-3). • Remove field circuits one at a time until
earth-ground offset voltage restores to 6.6
(nom.) Vdc.
• Check for connections to earth ground on
field circuit whose removal restored
proper earth-ground offset voltage.

December 2004 5-2 P/N 06-236529-001


Troubleshooting

Table 5-1. General System Events (Continued)

General System Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

Control Unit PSU Trouble The power-supply output is too low • Check the power-supply connector, J12,
On from the power supply to the main
printed-circuit board
• Check for proper setting of printed-circuit-
board AC Selection Switch. Refer to
Figure 2-8.
• Remove secondary and primary power.
Label and disconnect all field wiring.
Caution:
Disconnect all electrical control heads and
short together and tape wiring to initiators
(if applicable)
• Remove main printed-circuit board by
reversing the steps in Paragraph 2-6.
Inspect connections of power-supply-
connector flying leads to power supply.
Tighten if necessary.
• Ensure AC Selector Switch on power
supply is correctly set for line voltage.
Refer to Figure 2-5.
• Re-install printed-circuit board, connect
field wiring, and apply primary and
secondary power if loose connection(s) or
incorrect AC Selector-Switch setting.
Perform functional tests as necessary
• Replace power supply if no loose
connections or AC Selector-Switch
problem.
Event Memory Checksum Internal software fault • Use the control unit configuration
Failure On program to download the event log and
forward an electronic copy to Fenwal
Technical Services. Refer to the
configuration program user's guide.
• Re-initialize the control unit by first
removing, and then re-applying, primary
and secondary power sources
• Functionally test the system
Event Memory Write Internal software fault • Use the control unit configuration
Failure On program to download the event log and
forward an electronic copy to Fenwal
Technical Services. Refer to the
configuration program user's guide.
• Re-initialize the control unit by first
removing, and then re-applying, primary
and secondary power sources
• Functionally test the system

P/N 06-236529-001 5-3 December 2004


Troubleshooting

Table 5-1. General System Events (Continued)

General System Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

Low Battery Fault On Discharged battery. Open-circuit voltage • Disconnect battery leads from main circuit
of two series-wired batteries must be board TB3 and use digital volt-ohm meter
greater than 19.5 Vdc. to measure battery open-circuit voltage.
Replace batteries if open-circuit voltage is
Note: Low-battery fault messages do not less than 19.5 Vdc.
disappear immediately when corrected. • Reconnect batteries to TB3 if open-circuit
The control unit only rechecks the voltage is greater than 19.5 Vdc. Let
battery voltage once per minute. batteries re-charge for 48 hours. Re-place
batteries if fault remains after 48 hours.
Main Board Voltage The control unit has detected system- • Check the power-supply connector, J12,
Reference Fault On common reference fault from the power supply to the main
printed-circuit board
• Check for proper setting of printed-circuit-
board AC Selection Switch. Refer to
Figure 2-8.
• Remove secondary and primary power.
Label and disconnect all field wiring.
Caution:
Disconnect all electrical control heads and
short together and tape wiring to initiators
(if applicable)
• Remove main printed-circuit board by
reversing the steps in Section 2-6. Inspect
connections of power-supply connector
flying leads to power supply. Tighten if
necessary.
• Ensure AC Selector Switch on power
supply is correctly set for line voltage.
Refer to Figure 2-5.
• Re-install printed-circuit board, connect
field wiring, and apply primary and
secondary power if loose connection(s) or
incorrect AC Selector-Switch setting.
Perform functional tests as necessary
• Replace power supply if no loose
connections or AC Selector-Switch
problem.
• Replace printed-circuit board if fault
remains after replacement of the power
supply.
Printer Supervision Fault Communications problem between • Check RS-232 cable between main printed
printer and the control unit or printer circuit board and printer
port enabled but no printer is connected • Make sure printer is powered and
connected
• Verify that the RS-232 port assigned to the
printer via the menu is correct. Refer to
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.5
• Disable printer port if no printer is used

December 2004 5-4 P/N 06-236529-001


Troubleshooting

Table 5-1. General System Events (Continued)

General System Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

Program Memory Corrupt On Program memory self-test failure. • Use the control unit configuration
program to download the event log and
forward an electronic copy to Fenwal
Technical Services. Refer to the
configuration program user's guide.
• Re-initialize the control unit by first
removing, and then re-applying, primary
and secondary power sources
• Functionally test the system
SLC Communications Fault This indicates that there has been a • Use the control unit configuration
On communication problem between the program to download the event log and
two processors on the control unit and forward an electronic copy to Fenwal
the SLC is not being monitored. Technical Services. Refer to the
Configuration Program User’s Guide.
• Re-initialize the control unit by first
removing, and then re-applying, primary
and secondary power sources
• Functionally test the system.
SLC Open Circuit On Open circuit in the field wiring • Look for discontinuity in SLC wiring.
connected to main circuit board TB1.
Applies to Class-A wiring only
SLC Short Circuit On Short circuit in the field wiring • Troubleshoot SLC wiring by breaking-up
connected to main circuit board TB1 circuit to isolate short circuit to specific
branch or leg.
Date/Time Must Be Set Message appears each time the control • Set the date and time as instructed in
Trouble On unit is re-initialized by applying AC and Paragraph 3-2.6.2.
then DC power.

P/N 06-236529-001 5-5 December 2004


Troubleshooting

Table 5-2. Control-Unit-Based-Output Events

Control-Unit-Based-Output Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

AR1 Open Circuit Trouble On Open circuit in field wiring connected to • Look for discontinuity in Release-1
main circuit board TB12 field wiring. Refer to Paragraph 2-11.
AR1 Short Circuit Trouble On Short circuit in field wiring connected • Troubleshoot Release-1 wiring by
to main circuit board TB12 breaking-up circuit to isolate short
circuit to specific leg.
AR2 Open Circuit Trouble On Open circuit in field wiring connected to • Look for discontinuity in Release-2
main circuit board TB11 field wiring. Refer to Paragraph 2-11.
AR2 Short Circuit Trouble On Short circuit in field wiring connected • Troubleshoot Release-2 wiring by
to main circuit board TB11 breaking-up circuit to isolate short
circuit to specific leg.
AR3 Open Circuit Trouble On Open circuit in field wiring connected to • Look for discontinuity in Combo-1
main circuit board TB7. Combo-1 field wiring. Refer to
Circuit is configured as a release Paragraph 2-10.2.
circuit.
AR3 Short Circuit Trouble On Short circuit in field wiring connected • Troubleshoot Combo-1 wiring by
to main circuit board TB7. Combo-1 breaking-up circuit to isolate short
Circuit is configured as a release circuit to specific leg.
circuit.
AR4 Open Circuit Trouble On Open circuit in field wiring connected to • Look for discontinuity in Combo-2
main circuit board TB6. Combo-2 field wiring. Refer to
Circuit is configured as a release Paragraph 2-10.2.
circuit.
AR4 Short Circuit Trouble On Short circuit in field wiring connected • Troubleshoot Combo-2 wiring by
to main circuit board TB6. Combo-2 breaking-up circuit to isolate short
Circuit is configured as a release circuit to specific leg.
circuit.
SG1 Open Circuit Trouble On Open circuit in field wiring connected to • Check for missing 10k end-of-line
main circuit board TB5 resistor.
• Look for discontinuity in NAC1 field
wiring.
SG1 Short Circuit Trouble On Short circuit in field wiring connected • Troubleshoot NAC1 wiring by
to main circuit board TB5 breaking-up circuit to isolate short
circuit to specific leg.
SG2 Open Circuit Trouble On Open circuit in field wiring connected to • Check for missing 10k end-of-line
main circuit board TB14 resistor.
• Look for discontinuity in NAC2 field
wiring.
SG2 Short Circuit Trouble On Open circuit in field wiring connected to • Troubleshoot NAC2 wiring by
main circuit board TB14 breaking-up circuit to isolate short
circuit to specific leg.
SG3 Open Circuit Trouble On Open circuit in field wiring connected to • Check for missing 10k end-of-line
main circuit board TB7. Combo-1 resistor.
Circuit is configured as a NAC. • Look for discontinuity in Combo-1
field wiring.
SG3 Short Circuit Trouble On Short circuit in field wiring connected • Troubleshoot Combo-1 wiring by
to main circuit board TB7. Combo-1 breaking-up circuit to isolate short
Circuit is configured as a NAC. circuit to specific leg.

December 2004 5-6 P/N 06-236529-001


Troubleshooting

Table 5-2. Control-Unit-Based-Output Events (Continued)

Control-Unit-Based-Output Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

SG4 Open Circuit Trouble On Open circuit in field wiring connected to • Check for missing 10k end-of-line
main circuit board TB6. Combo-2 resistor.
Circuit is configured as a NAC. • Look for discontinuity in Combo-2
field wiring.
SG4 Short Circuit Trouble On Short circuit in field wiring connected • Troubleshoot Combo-2 wiring by
to main circuit board TB6. Combo-2 breaking-up circuit to isolate short
Circuit is configured as a NAC. circuit to specific leg.

P/N 06-236529-001 5-7 December 2004


Troubleshooting

Table 5-3. SLC Events

SLC Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

Addr Switch Not Set On AlarmLine An incorrect configuration for the AAM • Check the configuration settings for
Module at address Addr the AAM. Re-configure and upload
the correct configuration.
• Refer to AlarmLine Installation,
Operation, and Maintenance Manual,
P/N 73.04
Addr 24 Vdc Failure Signal/ Sounder Failure of the DC to DC converter in the • Refer to ASM Installation
ASM at address Addr Instructions, P/N 06-235717-001.
• Check 24 Vdc power connections to
ASM.
• Ensure that the ASM's Jumper P1
and Switch S1 are set for 24 Vdc
operation
• Replace the ASM if steps above are
unsuccessful
Addr 9V DC Fault On Device Type A failure of the internally generated • Check SLC wiring. Refer to
9-Volt power supply for the SmartOne Paragraph 2-8 Ensure that wiring-
smoke or heat detector at address Addr. resistance and -capacitance
limitations have not been exceeded.
• Visually inspect the detector to
ensure that its red LED is flashing.
Use Handheld Programmer to test the
device if the LED is not flashing. Refer
to Appendix D. Replace the detector if
it fails the Handheld-Programmer
test.
• List the automatic initiating device's
9-Volt level. Refer to
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.3.11. Replace the
device if the 9-Volt level varies by + / -
1.0 (nom.) Vdc volts.
• Conduct an initiating device test on
the automatic detector. See
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.5
• Activate and confirm a proper alarm
response from the detector.
• Replace the device if any of the above
tests are unsuccessful.
Addr Abort Trouble On Monitor Module The abort switch being monitored by • Check abort switch for mechanical
the AI at address Addr is activated and failure
the system is not in alarm

December 2004 5-8 P/N 06-236529-001


Troubleshooting

Table 5-3. SLC Events (Continued)

SLC Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

Addr Alarm Test Fail Device Type An initiating device (i.e., automatic • Globally isolate all outputs. See
detector or monitor module) at address Paragraph 3-2.5.2.2.7.
Addr failed a device test. The initiating • Disconnect device from SLC and
device was unable to send an acceptable visually inspect for damage. Clean if
alarm-test signal when requested by the automatic detector.
control unit. • Use Handheld Programmer to test the
device. Refer to Appendix D.
Reconnect device to SLC.
• Conduct an initiating device test on
the initiating device. Repeat this
procedure at least 3 times. See
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.5. Check SLC
wiring if test results are inconsistent.
Refer to Paragraph 2-8. Ensure that
wiring-resistance and -capacitance
limitations have not been exceeded.
• Activate and confirm a proper alarm
response from the initiating device
• Replace device if any of above tests is
unsuccessful.
• Globally de-isolate all outputs. See
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.2.7.
Addr Communication Fault On A loss of communications between the • Check device connections to SLC
SLC's driver circuit and the device at wiring
address Addr. • Ensure that device has not been
removed
• Check SLC wiring for excessive
capacitance and/or resistance if the
device LED is blinking. Refer to
Paragraph 2-8.1. Rewire SLC using
recommended wire in Appendix A.
• Replace the device if above
procedures are unsuccessful.
Addr Detector Tbl On AnaLASER A problem in a high-sensitivity smoke • Check the AIM-to-HSSD connections
Interface Module detector (HSSD) being monitored by an • Use LaserNET to troubleshoot the
AIM HSSD.
• Refer to AnaLASER II Installation,
Operation, and Maintenance Manual,
P/N 89.200.

P/N 06-236529-001 5-9 December 2004


Troubleshooting

Table 5-3. SLC Events (Continued)

SLC Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

Addr Drift Fault On Device Type The inability of a SmartOne smoke • Globally isolate all outputs. See
detector to further compensate for Paragraph 3-2.5.2.2.7.
reference signal variation • Disconnect smoke detector from SLC
and visually inspect for damage.
Clean the detector as recommended.
• Use Handheld Programmer to test the
device. Refer to Appendix D.
Reconnect device to SLC.
• Measure the detector sensitivity. See
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.3.6. Replace the
detector if the clean-air reference
value is more than one half of the
alarm-threshold value.
• Conduct an initiating device test on
the detector. See
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.1.
• Activate and confirm a proper alarm
response from the detector.
• Replace device if any of above tests is
unsuccessful.
• Globally de-isolate all outputs. See
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.2.7.
Addr Duplicate Address Fault On There is more than one SLC device with • Find all SLC devices with rapidly-
address Addr. Refer to pulsing LEDs. Monitor modules
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.16 require an external LED to be
installed.
• Check the approved layout drawing
for the correct address corresponding
to each device location
• Remove the incorrectly-addressed
device(s) and re-address with the
Handheld Programmer. Refer to
Appendix D. Alternatively,
• Remove the correctly-addressed
device and all but one incorrectly-
addressed device. Use the procedure
in Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.6 to change
the incorrect device address.
• Add one more incorrectly-addressed
device and re-address using the
procedure in Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.6.
Repeat as necessary until all
incorrectly-addressed devices have
been correctly addressed.
• Reconnect the original correctly-
addressed device
Addr EEPROM Fault ON The device at address Addr is reporting • Replace the device
an internal software fault

December 2004 5-10 P/N 06-236529-001


Troubleshooting

Table 5-3. SLC Events (Continued)

SLC Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

Addr High Airflow On AnaLASER A problem in a high-sensitivity smoke • Look for leaks in the HSSD's piping
Interface Module detector (HSSD) being monitored by an system
AIM. Excessively high air flow through • Use LaserNET to troubleshoot the
the piping system HSSD. The airflow may need to re-
normalized.
• Refer to AnaLASER II Installation,
Operation, and Maintenance Manual,
P/N 89.200.
Addr Input Trouble On Monitor Module An open circuit in a monitor module's • Refer to AI Installation Instructions,
initiating device circuit P/N 06-235578-001.
• Look for discontinuity in initiating
device circuit.
• Check for missing 10k end-of-line
resistor.
Addr Line Volt Fault On Device Type A failure of the DC to DC converter in • Check SLC wiring. Refer to
the device type at address Addr. Paragraph 2-8. Ensure that wiring-
resistance and -capacitance
limitations have not been exceeded.
• Visually inspect the device to ensure
that its red LED is flashing (if
applicable). Use Handheld
Programmer to test the device. Refer
to Appendix D. Replace the device if it
fails the Handheld-Programmer test.
• List the device's line-voltage level.
Refer to Paragraph 3-2.5.2.3.10.
Line-voltage level must be a minimum
18 Vdc. Consider using larger wire
gauge if line voltage is too low.
• Conduct an initiating device test if the
device is an initiating device. See
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.5.1. Be sure to
observe the warnings called out in
this chapter.
• Conduct an output device test if the
device is a control module. See
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.6. Be sure to
observe the warnings called out in
these paragraphs.
• Activate and confirm a proper
operation for the device.
• Replace the device if any of the above
tests are unsuccessful.
Addr Low Airflow On AnaLASER A problem in a high-sensitivity smoke • Look for blockages in the HSSD's
Interface Module detector (HSSD) being monitored by an piping system
AIM • Use LaserNET to troubleshoot the
Low air flow through the piping system HSSD. The airflow may need to re-
normalized.
• Refer to AnaLASER II Installation,
Operation, and Maintenance Manual,
P/N 89.200.

P/N 06-236529-001 5-11 December 2004


Troubleshooting

Table 5-3. SLC Events (Continued)

SLC Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

Addr Not Registered On Device Type The control unit has not been set up to • Register the device if part of system
expect the device at address "addr". configuration. See
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.13. This
procedure is insufficient. One of the
following three procedures must also
be conducted.
• Run the AutoLearn Procedure. Refer
to Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.24.
• Run the AutoSetup Procedure. Refer
to Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.25.
• Upload a new application program
that includes the previously
unregistered device.
Addr Offset Trouble On AnaLASER The AIM at address Addr is reporting • Work with the end user to improve the
Interface Module an offset problem with the HSSD that it air quality in the HSSD location.
is monitoring. This is probably a • Check the AIM-to-HSSD connections
problem with the background • Use LaserNET to troubleshoot the
obscuration level in the area of the HSSD
HSSD.
• Refer to HSSD Installation/
Maintenance Manual, P/N 89.200, for
guidance.
Addr Output Relay Fault Addressable The AO at address Addr failed to Caution:
Relay activate upon receipt of an activation Be sure to bypass the shutoff to
command equipment controlled by the AO
before functionally testing this device.
• Check SLC wiring. Refer to
Paragraph 2-8. Ensure that wiring-
resistance and -capacitance
limitations have not been exceeded.
• Visually inspect the AO to ensure that
its red LED is flashing. Use Handheld
Programmer to test the device if the
LED is not flashing. Refer to
Appendix D. Replace the AO if it fails
the Handheld-Programmer test.
• Functionally test the existing or
replaced AO via the procedure in
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.6. Replace the AO
if it fails the functional test.
• Functionally re-test the AO for all
configured actuation scenarios.

December 2004 5-12 P/N 06-236529-001


Troubleshooting

Table 5-3. SLC Events (Continued)

SLC Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

Addr Output Relay Fault The ASM at address Addr failed to • Check SLC wiring. Refer to
Signal/Sounder activate upon receipt of an activation Paragraph 2-8. Ensure that wiring-
command resistance and capacitance
limitations have not been exceeded.
• Visually inspect the ASM to ensure
that its red LED is flashing. Use
Handheld Programmer to test the
device if the LED is not flashing.
Refer to Appendix D. Replace the
ASM if it fails the Handheld-
Programmer test.
• Functionally test the existing or
replaced ASM via the procedure in
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.6. Replace the
ASM if it fails the functional test.
• Functionally re-test the ASM for all
configured actuation scenarios.
Addr Output Trouble On Open or short circuit in notification- • Refer to ASM Installation
Signal/Sounder appliance circuit for ASM at address Instructions, P/N 06-235717-001.
Addr. See Paragraph 1-5.5 • Look for discontinuity in NAC wiring
to find open circuit.
• Check for missing 47k end-of-line
resistor.
• Troubleshoot NAC wiring by
breaking-up circuit to isolate short
circuit to specific leg.
Addr Overheat On Alarmline Module An AlarmLine cable being monitored by • Check the monitored area for
an AAM and configured for overheat excessively-high temperature.
detection is reporting an overheat • Start air-conditioning units to lower
condition. This is not an error message. temperature in monitored area.
The control unit's buzzer will sound but
no LED on the membrane will
illuminate. Notification will only occur if
programmed via an EOC statement.
Addr PSU Open Circuit On Loss of 24 Vdc signal to power-input • Refer to ASM Installation
Signal/Sounder circuit of ASM at address Addr. See Instructions, P/N 06-235717-001.
Paragraph 1-5.5. • Check 24 Vdc power connections to
ASM.
• Ensure that the ASM's Jumper P1
and Switch S1 are set for 24 Vdc
operation
• Check auxiliary power supply for
faults.
Addr PSU Short Circuit On Appearance of 0 Vdc signal at power- • Refer to ASM Installation
Signal/Sounder input circuit of ASM at address "Addr". Instructions, P/N 06-235717-001.
See Paragraph 1-5.5. • Check 24 Vdc power connections to
ASM.
• Ensure that the ASM's Jumper P1
and Switch S1 are set for 24 Vdc
operation
• Check auxiliary power supply for
faults.

P/N 06-236529-001 5-13 December 2004


Troubleshooting

Table 5-3. SLC Events (Continued)

SLC Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

Addr RAM Fault ON The device at address Addr is reporting • Replace the device
an internal software fault
Addr Sensor Fault On AlarmLine A problem in the AlarmLine cable being • Check the AlarmLine wiring
Module monitored by an AAM. connections to the AAM.
• Refer to AlarmLine Installation,
Operation, and Maintenance Manual,
P/N 73.04
Addr Trouble Open On Device Type Loss of communications to device at • Check device connections to SLC
address Addr wiring
• Ensure that device has not been
removed
• Check SLC wiring for excessive
capacitance and/or resistance if the
device LED is blinking. Refer to
Paragraph 2-8.1. Rewire SLC using
recommended wire in Appendix B.
• Use the procedure in
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.14 to de-register
the address if no device should
occupy that address.
Addr Type Error On Device Type The device at address Addr is reporting • Ensure that the device installed at
a device type that is different from the address Addr matches the device type
type of device that is configured for that configured for that address. Install
address corrected device or correct
configuration file and re-upload
application.
• Use Handheld Programmer to test the
device if the device type matches the
entry in the configuration file. Refer to
Appendix D. Replace the device if it
fails the test or if the error message
returns when the device is re-
installed.
• Intermittent type errors could be a
symptom of SLC wiring problems.
Check SLC wiring if random errors
are reported. Refer to Paragraph 2-8.
Ensure that wiring-resistance and -
capacitance limitations have not been
exceeded.

December 2004 5-14 P/N 06-236529-001


Troubleshooting

Table 5-4. Remote-Display/Annunciator Events

Remote-Display/Annunciator Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

ATMAddr Acknowledge Input Fault On An open circuit in wiring from the ATM- • Refer to ATM Installation Manual,
L's "Acknowledge" input terminal to the P/N 06-236179-001.
associated annunciator's acknowledge • Look for discontinuity in wiring to
switch. ATM-L address is Addr. acknowledge switch
• Check for missing 10k end-of-line
resistor.
ATMAddr Communication Fault On A communications fault between the • Check the RS-485 wiring from main
main printed circuit board and the ATM printed circuit board Terminal Block
at address Addr. TB15 to ATM Terminal Blocks TB1
and TB2. Refer to Figures 2-27 and
2-28.
• Check for a discontinuity in the
RS-485 field wiring (Terminal Blocks
TB1 and TB2).
• Troubleshoot wiring to ATM Terminal
Blocks TB1 and TB2 by breaking-up
the circuits to isolate short circuit to
specific leg or legs.
• Check for 24 Vdc power at ATM
Terminal Block TB3.
• Ensure that the ATM's RS-485
Termination Jumper W1 is set
correctly
• Ensure that the ATM Address Switch
S1 is set correctly.
• Refer to ATM Installation Manual,
P/N 06-236179-001
ATMAddr Drill Input Fault On An open circuit in wiring from the ATM- • Refer to ATM Installation Manual,
L's "Drill" input terminal to the P/N 06-236179-001.
associated annunciator's drill switch. • Look for discontinuity in wiring to
ATM-L address is Addr. drill switch
• Check for missing 10k end-of-line
resistor.
ATMAddr Monitored Output Fault On An open circuit in any connection from • Refer to ATM Installation Manual,
the ATM to the LEDs (ATM-L) or relays P/N 06-236179-001.
(ATM-R) being driven • Look for discontinuity in wiring to
LEDs (ATM-L) or relays (ATM-R)
• Ensure that the correct supervision
link corresponding to the number of
outputs being used has been removed

P/N 06-236529-001 5-15 December 2004


Troubleshooting

Table 5-4. Remote-Display/Annunciator Events

Remote-Display/Annunciator Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

ATMAddr Not Registered On The control unit has not been set up to • Register the ATM if part of system
expect the ATM at ATM RS-485 circuit configuration. See Paragraph . This
address Addr. procedure is insufficient. The
following procedure must also be
conducted.
• Upload a new application program
that includes the previously
unregistered ATM.
• De-register the ATM if not part of
system configuration. See
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.39.
• Check the 24 Vdc power (Terminal
Block TB3)and RS-485
communications wiring (Terminal
Blocks TB1 and TB2) from the
control unit to the ATM
• Ensure that the ATM Address Switch
S1 is set correctly.
• Refer to ATM Installation Manual,
P/N 06-236179-001.
ATMAddr PSU Fault On A loss of 24 Vdc power at Terminal • Refer to ATM Installation Manual,
Block TB3 or an open circuit in the P/N 06-236179-001.
monitoring circuit from the ATM's "PS • Check for 24 Vdc power at ATM
Flt" and "Com" terminals to the Terminal Block TB3.
normally-closed trouble contacts of its • Look for discontinuity in wiring to
associated remote power supply remote-power-supply trouble
contacts. Jumper these terminals if
you are using the FENWALNET 6000
Control Unit to power the ATM.
• Check for trouble with third-party
remote power supply
ATMAddr Reset Input Fault On An open circuit in wiring from the ATM- • Refer to ATM Installation Manual,
L's "Reset" input terminal to the P/N 06-236179-001.
associated annunciator's reset switch. • Look for discontinuity in wiring to
ATM-L address is Addr reset switch
• Check for missing 10k end-of-line
resistor.
ATMAddr Silence Input Fault On An open circuit in wiring from the ATM- • Refer to ATM Installation Manual,
L's "Silence" input terminal to the P/N 06-236179-001.
associated annunciator's alarm-silence • Look for discontinuity in wiring to
switch. ATM-L address is Addr alarm-silence switch
• Check for missing 10k end-of-line
resistor.
ATMAddr Silenced Output Fault On An open circuit in wiring from the ATM- • Refer to ATM Installation Manual,
L's "Silence" output terminal to the P/N 06-236179-001.
associated annunciator's alarm-silence • Look for discontinuity in wiring to
LED. ATM-L address is Addr alarm-silence LED (if used)
• Check for missing 20k supervising
resistor if alarm-silence LED not
used.

December 2004 5-16 P/N 06-236529-001


Troubleshooting

Table 5-4. Remote-Display/Annunciator Events

Remote-Display/Annunciator Events

Error Message Probable Cause Corrective Action

ATMAddr Test Lamps Input Fault On An open circuit in wiring from the ATM- • Refer to ATM Installation Manual,
L's "Lamp Test" input terminal to the P/N 06-236179-001.
associated annunciator's lamp-test • Look for discontinuity in wiring to
switch. ATM-L address is Addr. lamp-test switch
• Check for missing 10k end-of-line
resistor.
RDCMAddr Communication Fault On A communications fault between the • Check the RS-485 wiring from main
main printed circuit board and the printed circuit board Terminal Block
RDCM at address Addr. TB15 to RDCM Terminal Block TB1.
Refer to Figures 2-27 and 2-28.
• Check for a discontinuity in the RS-
485 field wiring to RDCM (TB1,
Terminals 5 and 6 and 7 and 8).
• Troubleshoot wiring to RDCM TB1,
Terminals 5 and 6 and 7 and 8, by
breaking-up the circuits to isolate
short circuit to specific leg or legs.
• Check for 24 Vdc power at RDCM
TB1, Terminals 1 and 2.
• Ensure that the RDCM's RS-485
Termination Jumper W2 is set
correctly.
• Ensure that the RDCM Address
Switch S1 is set correctly.
• Check for duplicate addressed
RDCMs.
RDCMAddr Not Registered On The control unit has not been set up to • Register the RDCM if part of system
expect the RDCM at RDCM RS-485 configuration. See Paragraph .
circuit address Addr. • De-register the RDCM if not part of
system configuration. See
Paragraph 3-2.5.2.4.39.
• Check the 24 Vdc power (TB1,
Terminals 1 and 2) and RS-485
communications wiring (TB1,
Terminals 5 and 6 and 7 and 8) from
the control unit to the RDCM
• Ensure that the RDCM Address
Switch S1 is set correctly.
RDCMAddr PSU Fault On A loss of 24 Vdc power at TB1, • Check for 24 Vdc power at RDCM
Terminals 1 and 2 or an open circuit in Terminals 1 and 2.
the RDCM's monitoring circuit from • Look for discontinuity in wiring from
TB1, Terminals 3 and 4 to the Terminals 3 and 4 to remote-power-
normally-closed trouble contacts of its supply trouble contacts. Jumper
associated remote power supply these terminals if you are using the
FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit to
power the RDCM.
• Check for trouble with third-party
remote power supply

P/N 06-236529-001 5-17 December 2004


Troubleshooting

Do not leave a facility after performing any of the corrective actions listed in this chapter
until you have:
WARNING
· Performed sufficient system testing to ensure that the problem(s) has (have) been
corrected and that the system is in proper working condition
· Physically re-connected the wiring to initiator assemblies (if used) to the release-
circuits from which they were removed
· Physically re-connected all control heads (if used) to the associated agent-storage-
container discharge valves from which they were removed
· Physically re-connected the wiring to solenoid valves (if used) for pre-action/deluge
sprinkler systems
· Ensured that emergency operations controlled by this system such as facility power
shutoff are restored
· Notified personnel in the facility and at off-premises monitoring locations that you
have finished working on the system, that system servicing has ended, and that the
system has been restored to proper working conditions.

December 2004 5-18 P/N 06-236529-001


Parts List

CHAPTER 6
PARTS LIST

6-1 INTRODUCTION

The complete assemblies, sub-assemblies, and compatible peripheral devices associated with the
FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit are listed in the following tables.

Table 6-1. FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit and Replacement Sub-Assemblies

Model No. Part Number Description

FENWALNET 6000 74-600000-001 Control Unit (Blue) (complete assembly)


N/A 74-600000-007 Trim Ring (Blue)
FENWALNET 6000 74-600000-510 Control Unit (Red) (complete assembly)
N/A 74-600000-517 Trim Ring (Red)
N/A 74-600000-002 Enclosure w/ Door (Blue)
N/A 74-600000-511 Enclosure w/ Door (Red)
N/A 06-118394-002 Power Supply
N/A 74-600000-104 Printed-Circuit Board
N/A 06-220024-002 Installation/Hardware Kit
N/A 74-600000-011 Keypad/Display Assembly
N/A 06-220023-001 In-Line Releasing Device

Table 6-2. External Modules

Model No. Part Number Description

RDCM 74-300000-502 Rem. Display/Control Mod. (Beige)


RDCM 74-600000-005 Rem. Display/Control Mod. (Blue)
RDCM 74-600000-515 Rem. Display.Control Mod. (Red)
ATM-L 74-300004-032 Annun. Driver Module
ATM-R 74-300005-032 Relay Driver Module
N/A 74-600000-010 RDCM Trim Ring (Blue)
N/A 76-300000-510 RDCM Trim Ring (Red)

P/N 06-236529-001 6-1 December 2004


Parts List

Table 6-3. SLC Initiating and Control Devices

Model No. Part Number Description

PSD-7152 71-402001-100 Photoelectric Detector


PSD-7140 71-401001-000 Photoelectric Detector (retrofit only)
PSD-7140 71-401004-000 Photo. Det. w/ Relay (retrofit only)
CPD-7052 70-402001-100 Ionization Detector
CPD-7040 70-401001-000 Ionization Detector (retrofit only)
CPD-7040 70-401004-000 Ion. Det. w/ Relay (retrofit only)
THD-7252 70-404001-100 Heat Detector
6SB 70-400001-100 Flanged Detector Base
4SB 70-400001-101 Detector Base
MA-002 70-400001-200 Det.-Base Adapter
N/A 70-400001-000 Detector Base (retrofit only)
DH-2000 PSDI 70-403001-152 Duct Hous. w/ Photo. Det.
DH-2000CPDI 70-403001-052 Duct Hous. W/ Ion. Det.
DH-4000 70-403000-000 Duct Housing (retrofit only)
AI 70-407008-001 Monitor Module (N/O)
AI 70-407008-002 Monitor Module (N/C) (UL only)
AI 70-407018-001 Monitor Module (N/O) (non-silicone)
AI 70-407018-002 Monitor Module (N/C) (non-silicone; UL only)
AI 70-407004-001 Monitor Module (N/O) (retrofit only)
AO 70-408004-001 Control Module
AO 70-408014-001 Control Module (non-silicone)
AO 70-408001-000 Cont. Mod. w/o Mtg. Plate (retrofit only)
AO 70-408002-000 Cont. Mod. w/ Mtg. Plate (retrofit only)
AO 70-408003-000 Cont. Mod. w/ SS Mtg. Pl. (retrofit only)
AIM 89-300010-001 AnaLASER II Inter. Mod.
AAM 73-100003-001 Addr. Alarmline Mod. (in NEMA-4 enclosure)
ASM 70-200200-001 Addr. Signal Module
ASM-6SB 70-200200-002 Addr. Signal Module (on 6SB Detector Base)
N/A 74-200012-002 Isolator Module (single-gang mount)
N/A 74-200012-004 Isolator Module (detector-base mount)

Table 6-4. Notification Appliances

Model No. Part Number Description

MT-12/24 75-000010-001 Multi-Tone Horn


MT-24 Series 75-000015-001 Multi-Tone Horn w/15-75 cd Strobe (FIRE)
75-000015-002 Multi-Tone Horn w/15-75 cd Strobe (AGENT)
75-000016-001 Multi-Tone Horn w/75 cd Strobe (FIRE)

December 2004 6-2 P/N 06-236529-001


Parts List

Table 6-4. Notification Appliances

Model No. Part Number Description

75-000016-002 Multi-Tone Horn w/75 cd Strobe (AGENT)


75-000017-001 Multi-Tone Horn w/75 cd Strobe (FIRE) Weatherpr.
MIZ Series 75-000020-001 Mini Horn-Steady (Red)
75-000020-002 Mini Horn-Steady (White)
75-000025-001 Mini Horn-Steady/Temporal (Red)
75-000025-002 Mini Horn-Steady/Temporal (White)
NH-12/24 75-000080-001 Steady / Temporal Horn
NS-24 Series 75-000082-001 Steady/Temp. Horn w/15-75 cd Strobe (FIRE)
75-000082-002 Steady/Temp. Horn w/15-75 cd Strobe (AGENT)
75-000086-001 Steady/Temp. Horn w/15-30-75-110 cd Strobe (FIRE) Red
75-000086-002 Steady/Temp. Horn w/15-30-75-110 cd Strobe (AGENT) Red
75-000087-001 Steady/Temp. Horn w/15-30-75-110 cd Strobe (FIRE) Wht
75-000087-002 Steady/Temp. Horn w/15-30-75-110 cd Strobe (AGENT) Wht
RSS(P) Series 75-000002-011 15-75 cd Strobe (FIRE)
75-000002-012 Retrofit 15-75 cd Strobe (FIRE)
75-000002-013 15-75 cd Strobe (AGENT)
75-000005-021 15-30-75-110 cd Strobe (FIRE)-Red
75-000005-022 15-30-75-110 cd Strobe (AGENT)-Red
75-000005-023 Retrofit 15-30-75-110 cd Strobe (FIRE)-Red
75-000005-024 Retrofit 15-30-75-110 cd Strobe (AGENT)-Red
75-000005-031 15-30-75-110 cd Strobe (FIRE)-White
75-000005-032 15-30-75-110 cd Strobe (AGENT)-White
75-000005-033 Retrofit 15-30-75-110 cd Strobe (FIRE)-White
75-000005-034 Retrofit 15-30-75-110 cd Strobe (AGENT)-White
75-000005-041 75 cd Strobe (FIRE)-Weatherproof
75-000005-042 75 cd Strobe (AGENT)-Weatherproof

P/N 06-236529-001 6-3 December 2004


Parts List

Table 6-5. Batteries

Model No. Part Number Description

N/A 06-115915-047 12-V, 12-AH


N/A 06-115915-046 12-V, 17-AH
N/A 89-100052-001 12-V, 35-AH

Table 6-6. Miscellaneous

Model No. Part Number Description

N/A 70-411001-005 EOL Resistor Kit


N/A 74-200013-001 Device Programmer
N/A 06-129025-003 EOL Resistor-10K,0.5W

December 2004 6-4 P/N 06-236529-001


APPENDIX A
BATTERY CALCULATIONS

A-1 AC BRANCH CIRCUIT

The FENWALNET 6000 System requires a separate, dedicated connection to an AC branch circuit (120
Vac, 50/60 Hz, 3.2 A or 220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 1.6 A) that must be labeled “Fire Alarm.” This branch
circuit must connect to the line side of the main power connection for the premises. No other
equipment can be powered from the fire-alarm branch circuit.

The branch-circuit wire must run continuously, without any disconnection devices, from the source of
AC power to the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit. Over-current protection for this branch circuit must
comply with Article 760 of the National Electric Code and any other local electrical codes. Use a
minimum wire size of #14 AWG, with 600-volt insulation, for this branch circuit

A-2 CALCULATING THE STANDBY BATTERIES

Calculate the system operating current and alarm load using the template in Table A-1.

Table A-1. Calculating Operating System Current Load

Unit + Unit # *Ext. $


Ext. Ext. Ext.
Standby Standby Alm Pre-Rel. Rel Alarm Alm Pre-Rel. Rel.
Qty Unit
Current Current Qty Qty Qty Current Current Current Current
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)

1 FENWALNET 6000 0.2 0.2 1 1 1 0.650

- RDCM 0.064 - - - - 0.085 - - -


- ATM-L 0.045 - - - - 0.045 - - -
- LEDS * - - - - - 0.012 - - -
- ATM-R 0.045 - - - - 0.045 - - -
- Relays* - - - - - 0.025 - - -

- PSD-7152 0.000405 - - - - 0.000445 - - -


- CPD-7052 0.000400 - - - - 0.000440 - - -
- THD-7252 0.000400 - - - - 0.000440 - - -
- DH-2000 PSDI 0.000405 - - - - 0.000445 - - -
- DH-2000 CPDI 0.000400 - - - - 0.000440 - - -
- N/O AI 0.000450 - - - - 0.000450 - - -
- N/C AI 0.000450 - - - - 0.000450 - - -
- AIM 0.000450 - - - - 0.000450 - - -
- AAM 0.000450 - - - - 0.000450 - - -
- AO 0.000400 - - - - 0.000440 - - -
- ASM 0.000500 - - - - 0.000500 - - -
- ASM-6SB 0.000500 - - - - 0.000500 - - -
- Single-gang Isolator - - - - - - - - -
- Det.-base Isolator - - - - - - - - -

P/N 06-236529-001 A-1 December 2004


Table A-1. Calculating Operating System Current Load (Continued)

Unit + Unit # *Ext. $


Ext. Ext. Ext.
Standby Standby Alm Pre-Rel. Rel Alarm Alm Pre-Rel. Rel.
Qty Unit
Current Current Qty Qty Qty Current Current Current Current
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
- MT-12/24 * - - - - - 0.024 - - -
- MT-241575 * - - - - - 0.089 - - -
- MT-2475 * - - - - - 0.157 - - -
- MIZ-24 * - - - - - 0.012 - - -
- MIZ-TC24 * - - - - - 0.017 - - -
- NH-12/24 * - - - - - 0.015 - - -
- NS-241575 * - - - - - 0.079 - - -
- NS-24MC (Horn only) * - - - - - 0.015 - - -
- NS-24MC (w/15 cd) * - - - - - 0.058 - - -
- NS-24MC (w/30 cd) * - - - - - 0.082 - - -
- NS-24MC (w/75 cd) * - - - - - 0.140 - - -
- NS-24MC (w/110 cd) * - - - - - 0.174 - - -
- MB-G6-24 * - - - - - 0.030 - - -
- MB-G10-24 * - - - - - 0.030 - - -
- RSS-241575 * - - - - - 0.065 - - -
- RSS-24MC (15 cd) * - - - - - 0.050 - - -
- RSS-24MC (30 cd) * - - - - - 0.081 - - -
- RSS-24MC (75 cd) * - - - - - 0.133 - - -
- RSS-24MC (110 cd) * - - - - - 0.161 - - -
- SM Synch. Module * - - - - - 0.025 - - -
- DSM Synch. Module * - - - - - 0.038 - - -

- 897494 - - - - - 1.500 - - -
- 486500-01 - - - - - 0.240 - - -
- - - - - - - - -
- FM Solenoid (Group A) - - - - - 0.458 - - -
- FM Solenoid (Groups B,D) - - - - - 0.700 - - -
- FM Solenoid (Groups E,G) - - - - - 0.420 - - -

Total Standby Current (A) _______ Total Alarm Current (A) _______ _______ _______

Standby Hours _______ Alm Minutes _______ _______ _______

Standby AH _______ Alarm AH _______ _______ _______

* Typical currents. Refer to specific product information sheets. Total AH _______ _______ _______

Battery Size (AH) _______ _______ _______

Battery Capacity for Calculations(AH) (10% De-rating) _______

Max. Alarm Current (A) 5.400

+ (Qty) X (Unit Standby Current)


# (Alm Qty) X (Unit Alm Current)
* (Pre-Rel. Qty) X (Unit Alm Current)
$ (Rel. Qty) X (Unit Alm Current)

December 2004 A-2 P/N 06-236529-001


A-3 EXAMPLE

Consider a FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit that is monitoring a waterless extinguishing system for a
data-processing center. The automatic detection system consists of ten (10) Model PSD-7152
Photoelectric Detectors and ten (10) Model CPD-7052 Ionization Detectors, crossed-zoned in such a
manner that the activation of at least one photoelectric detector and one ionization detector is required
to automatically discharge the waterless extinguishing system. The initiating system also includes eight
Model AI Monitor Modules for manual-release, abort, and sprinkler-supervisory requirements. Four
(4) Model AO Relay Control Modules are being utilized for remote control function such as airflow
shutoff and power shutdown. One AO activates at pre-alarm, two additional AOs activate at pre-release,
and the final AO activates upon extinguishing-system discharge.

Six (6) Model NS-24MC combination horn/strobes (75 cd) are used for occupant notification. The
horns are activated during the pre-alarm condition. The strobes are activated at pre-release, and
remain on until the system is reset.

A Model 486500-01 Control Head is being used to activate the waterless extinguishing system. A pre-
action sprinkler system, controlled by an FM-Approved, Group B solenoid, will be activated
concurrently with the waterless extinguishing system.

The system is using a Model RDCM Remote-Display Module for additional event annunciation. The
standby-battery calculation is shown in Table A-2.

Table A-2. Standby Battery Calculation


Unit Ext. Unit Ext. Ext. Ext.
Standby Standby Alm Pre-Rel. Rel Alarm Alm Pre-Rel. Rel.
Qty Unit
Current Current Qty Qty Qty Current Current Current Current
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)

1 FENWALNET 6000 0.200 0.200 1 1 1 0.650 0.650 0.650 0.650


1 RDCM 0.064 0.064 1 1 1 0.085 0.085 0.085 0.085
10 PSD-7152 0.000405 0.004 1 1 1 0.000445 0.000 0.000 0.000
10 CPD-7052 0.000400 0.004 1 1 0.000440 0.000 0.000 0.000
8 N/O AI 0.000450 0.004 0.000450 0.000 0.000 0.000
4 AO 0.000400 0.002 1 2 4 0.000440 0.000 0.001 0.002
NS-24MC (Horn only) * - 0.000 6 0.015 0.090 0.000 0.000
6 NS-24MC (w/75 cd) * - 0.000 6 6 0.140 0.000 0.840 0.840
1 486500-01 - 0.000 1 0.240 0.000 0.000 0.240
1 FM Solenoid (Groups B,D) - 0.000 1 0.700 0.000 0.000 0.700

Total Standby Current (A) 0.277 Total Alarm Current (A) 0.839 1.590 2.531

Standby Hours 24 Alm Minutes 5 5 5

Standby AH 6.654 Alarm AH 0.070 0.133 0.211

* Typical currents. Refer to specific product information sheets. Total AH 6.72 6.79 6.86

Battery Size (AH) 12

Battery Capacity for Calculations(AH) (10% De-rating) 10.8

Max. Alarm Current (A) 5.400

Round up to next whole number (7 AH) using the largest-calculated battery capacity (6.86 AH) for the
required standby-battery size.

P/N 06-236529-001 A-3 December 2004


Use Table A-3 to determine the maximum standby currents that can be used as a function of the
required standby hours and the size of the battery used.

Table A-3. Maximum Standby Currents vs. Standby Duration and Battery Size

Standby Duration Alarm Duration Max. Standby Max. Alarm Current


Max. Battery (AH)
(hrs.) (min.) Current (A) (A)

4 5 1.4 5.4 7
4 5 2.5 5.4 12
24 5 0.4 5.4 12
24 5 1.2 5.4 35
60 5 0.5 5.4 35
90 10 0.3 5.4 35
24 5 2.6 5.4 70
60 5 1.0 5.4 70
90 10 0.6 5.4 70

December 2004 A-4 P/N 06-236529-001


APPENDIX A
WIRING REQUIREMENTS FOR FENWALNET 6000
SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT
A-1 RECOMMENDED WIRE TYPES

For best results, use twisted, unshielded, low-capacitance, addressable-fire-alarm wire with a nominal
wire-to-wire capacitance of approximately 20 pf (picofarads, where 1 pf = 10-6 µF) per foot for the
signaling-line circuit. Typical wire types that meet these criteria are indicated below:

Table A-1. Typical Wire Types - 18 AWG

Manufacturer Part Number Rating Cap (pf/ft.)

Atlas Wire and Cable Corp. 228-18-1-1TP FPL 12.5


West Penn Wire D980 FPL 16.0
West Penn Wire 60980B FPLP 29.0
Coleman Cable 98181 FPL 19.0
Coleman Cable 98820 FPLR 26.0
Clifford of Vermont, Inc. 1P18 B1 FPL-M FPL 15.0
Comtran Corporation 4184 FPLR 20.0
Belden Wire and Cable Co. 5320UJ FPL 12.5
Belden Wire and Cable Co. 9571 FPLR 22.0
Belden Wire and Cable Co. 6320UJ FPLP 25.0
BSCC 341802E FPLP 25.0
Genesis Cable Systems 4050 FPL 15.0
Genesis Cable Systems 4431 FPLR 15.0
Genesis Cable Systems 4631 FPLP 16.0

P/N 06-236529-001 A-1 December 2004


Table A-2. Typical Wire Types - 16 AWG

Manufacturer Part Number Rating Cap (pf/ft.)

Atlas Wire and Cable Corp. 228-16-1-1TP FPL 12.5


West Penn Wire D990 FPL 18.0
Coleman Cable 98161 FPL 20.0
Coleman Cable 98620 FPLR 27.0
Clifford of Vermont, Inc. 1P16 B1 FPL-M FPL 19.0
Comtran Corporation 4234 FPLR 20.0
Belden Wire and Cable Co. 5220UJ FPL 13.5
Belden Wire and Cable Co. 9572 FPLR 29.0
Belden Wire and Cable Co. 6220UJ FPLP 27.0
BSCC 341602E FPLP 18.0
Genesis Cable Systems 4051 FPL 17.0
Genesis Cable Systems 4432 FPLR 17.0
Genesis Cable Systems 4632 FPLP 18.0

Table A-3. Typical Wire Types - 14 AWG

Manufacturer Part Number Rating Cap (pf/ft.)

Atlas Wire and Cable Corp. 228-14-1-1TP FPL 14.5


Coleman Cable 98141 FPL 20.0
Coleman Cable 98420 FPLR 25.0
Comtran Corporation 4240 FPLR 21.0
Belden Wire and Cable Co. 9580 FPLR 27.0
Belden Wire and Cable Co. 6120UJ FPLP 25.9
BSCC 341402E FPLP 20.0
Genesis Cable Systems 4052 FPL 19.0
Genesis Cable Systems 4433 FPLR 19.0
Genesis Cable Systems 4633 FPLP 20.0

Table A-4. Typical Wire Types - 12 AWG

Manufacturer Part Number Rating Cap (pf/ft.)

Coleman Cable 98121 FPL 27.0


Coleman Cable 98200 FPLR 29.0
Genesis Cable Systems 4054 FPL 21.0
Genesis Cable Systems 4434 FPLR 22.0

December 2004 A-2 P/N 06-236529-001


A-2 EXAMPLE NO. 1

Determine the recommended wire size for a daisy-chained, Class-B, Style-4 SLC with 160 devices and
a total wire length of 7,500 feet. The total wire length is the sum of wiring for the positive and negative
SLC legs, and is not the linear distance from the control unit to the most-remote device.

Try #14 AWG wire. The total SLC wiring resistance is:
7,500 ft. x 2.525 ohms / 1,000 ft. = 18.9 ohms.

If Coleman Cable wire is selected, P/N 98141 (from Recommended Wire Listing), the total SLC wiring
capacitance is:
3,750 ft x 20 x 10-12 farads / ft. = 0.075 x 10-6 farads (or, 0.075 µF).

Coleman Cable wire, PN 98141, is acceptable.


Note: Capacitance values correspond to a pair of wires as compared to resistance values that
correspond to a single conductor. The wire-pair length for this SLC is 3,750 feet, and this value
is used for the SLC’s capacitance calculation.

A-3 EXAMPLE NO. 2

Determine the proper wire size for a Class-A, Style-6 SLC with 100 devices and a total wire length 7,000
feet. The total wire length is the sum of wiring for the positive and negative SLC legs for both the
primary and redundant communications circuits, and is not the linear distance from the control unit
to the most remote device.

Try #18 AWG wire first. The total SLC wiring resistance is using #18 AWG is:
7,000 ft. x 6.385 ohms / 1,000 ft. = 44.7 ohms.

The total SLC wiring resistance (44.7 ohms) when using #18 AWG wire exceeds the maximum SLC
wiring resistance of 40.0 ohms. Use larger wire.

Try #16 AWG next. The total SLC wiring resistance using #16 AWG is:
7,000 ft. x 4.016 ohms / 1,000 ft. = 28.1 ohms.

The total SLC wiring resistance (28.1 ohms) when using #16 AWG wire is less than the maximum SLC
wiring resistance of 40 ohms. The SLC wiring resistance using #16 AWG wire is acceptable.

If Coleman Cable wire is selected, P/N 98161 (from Recommended Wire Listing), the total SLC wiring
capacitance is:
3,500 ft x 20 x 10-12 farads / ft. = 0.07 x 10-6 farads (or, 0.07 µF).

Coleman Cable wire, P/N 98161, is acceptable.

P/N 06-236529-001 A-3 December 2004


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

December 2004 A-4 P/N 06-236529-001


APPENDIX A
LISTED AND APPROVED RELEASING DEVICES

A-1 RELEASING CIRCUIT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

The following electrical characteristics apply to the dedicated releasing circuits, Release 1 and
Release 2.

Table A-1. Release 1 and 2 Circuit Electrical Characteristics

Characteristic Solenoids Initiators

Maximum Devices. 2 12
Minimum Peak Firing Current 2.8 A / 30 ms 1.5 A / 10 ms
Maximum Steady Firing Current 2.4 A ---
Max. Open-Circuit Term. Voltage 28.0 28.0
Min. Open-Circuit Term. Voltage 20.0 20.0
Maximum Supervision Current 5 ma 5 ma
Dummy Load 10 k Ohms ---

A-2 COMBINATION CIRCUIT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS FOR RELEASING

The following electrical characteristics apply to the combination circuits, Combo 1 and Combo 2.

Table A-2. Combo 1 and 2 Circuit Electrical Characteristics

Characteristic Solenoids Initiators

Maximum Devices 1 Do Not Use


Minimum Peak Firing Current 2.8 A / 30 ms ---
Maximum Steady Firing Current 2.4 A ---
Max. Open-Circuit Term. Voltage 28.0 ---
Min. Open-Circuit Term. Voltage 20.0 ---
Maximum Supervision Current 5 ma ---
Dummy Load 10 k Ohms ---

P/N 06-236529-001 A-1 December 2004


A-3 UL LISTED AND FM APPROVED SOLENOIDS

The solenoids in Table A-3 are UL Listed and FM Approved as noted.

Table A-3. UL Listed and FM Approved Solenoids

Wire Length (Ft.)


Resistance
I (max.)
Device (min.) “On” Time Comment
A 12 14 16 18
ohms
AWG AWG AWG AWG

890181 2.40 10.0 Momentary 300 200 120 —


897494 1.50 15.9 Continuous 380 240 150 — Max. One (1) per System
486500-01 0.240 103.0 Continuous 3000 2000 1200 800
81-100000-001 0.440 59.0 Continuous 2300 1460 915 570
06-118329-001 0.225 108.0 Continuous 3000 2000 1200 800 FM Approved; Not UL Listed
06-118384-001 0.520 46.0 Continuous 1440 760 480 340 UL Listed; Not FM Approved
38-509837-001 0.400 60.0 Continuous 2300 1460 915 570
38-509834-001 0.632 38.0 Continuous 1050 550 330 240
87-120099-001 2.00 12.0 Continuous 360 240 140 — Max. One (1) per System
93-487100-001 2.00 12.0 Continuous 360 240 140 — Max. One (1) per System

FM Group A 0.458 52.0 Continuous 1440 760 480 340


FM Groups B,D 0.700 34.0 Continuous 940 500 300 220
FM Groups E,G 0.420 57.0 Continuous 1570 760 525 370

A-4 UL LISTED AND FM APPROVED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY

The following initiator assemblies are UL Listed and FM Approved.

Table A-4. UL Listed and FM Approved Actuator Assembly

Part Number Max. No. per Release Ckt. Max. Rel. Ckt. Resistance

31-199932-004 12 10 ohms +/- 1 ohm


93-191001-001 6 10 ohms +/- 1 ohm

December 2004 A-2 P/N 06-236529-001


APPENDIX A
HANDHELD-PROGRAMMER OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A-1 DESCRIPTION

The Handheld Programmer (hereinafter referred to as the Programmer) provides the system
installer/service person with a convenient means to assign device address information and test device
operation.

A-2 GENERAL NOTE

Prior to using the Programmer, you need to ensure that you have the supplied accessories, listed in the
table below:

A-2.1 Accessory List

Part No. Description

74-200013-001 Device Programmer (complete Unit)

06-117999-001 AC/DC Power Pack*

06-118003-001 AC Cord*

06-117998-001 Battery Pack (installed in device)*

* All supplied in top level Part No. 74-200013-001

A-3 DEVICES SUPPORTED

The Programmer is designed to support all SmartOne intelligent/addressable devices. A table of


supported devices accompanies these instructions.

Prepare the Programmer for Operation with AC Adapter


1. Connect Device Interface Cable to the SLC connector on the top of the Programmer.
2. Connect the small plug of the power pack to the DC IN connector on the top of the Programmer,
and then plug the line cord into a 120 Vac, 60Hz outlet.
3. Verify that the green "DC Input" LED is lit. The yellow "Bat. Charger" LED will also light if the
batteries are not fully charged.
4. Set the power switch to the "on" position (up direction).
5. Verify that the green "Power On" LED is lit and that the display is flashing each of the segments
used to display characters.
6. After 30 seconds ensure the top row of the display is flashing (---). The bottom row of the display
should be blank.

P/N 06-236529-001 A-1 December 2004


Table A-1. Trouble Code Table

Code Trouble

E00 Programmer Trouble - An internal trouble condition has been detected within the Programmer.
Remove all power. Re-energize and allow the Programmer to re-initialize. If it does not operate
(Programmer Trouble remains), return Programmer to factory for repair.
E01 Alarm Test Fail - The connected device has failed Alarm Test. Remove device and allow Programmer
to clear. Re-attach failed device. Change address of device. Allow Programmer to complete entire
process before disconnecting leads from the device. If device fails test again, return device for repair.
E02 Addressable Set Trouble - The Programmer has detected a trouble condition during address setting
of connected device. Disconnect Programmer and allow it to clear. Reattach device and set address
in device. If device fails again, return device for repair.
E95 Internal Device Open - The Programmer has received a trouble condition from the connected device.
Verify connected device has E.O.L. resistor connected (AI/ASM only). If the E.O.L. is not connected,
connect it to the device as required. Disconnect device from Programmer and allow it to clear.
Reattach unit to Programmer and set address on device.
E96 Device Open - Programmer has detected the connected device as being disconnected. Verify SLC
connection to Programmer and allow it to clear. Reattach and retry.
E99 SLC Short - SLC leads of Programmer have became shorted together.

A-4 PREPARE THE PROGRAMMER FOR OPERATION WITH INTERNAL BATTERIES


1. Connect Interface Cable to the SLC connector on the top of the Programmer.
2. Set the power switch to the “On” position (up direction).
3. Verify that the green “Power On” LED is lit and that the display is flashing each of the segments
used to display characters.
4. If the “Bat. Failure” LED is lit or no LEDs are lit, charge the batteries according to the Battery
Charging procedure.

A-5 BATTERY CHARGING

If the “Bat. Failure” LED lights on the Programmer, go to AC operation to charge the batteries as
described below:
1. Ensure that the power switch is in the “Off” position (down direction).
2. Connect the small plug of the power pack to the DC IN connector on the top of the Programmer.
3. Plug the line cord into a 120 Vac, 60Hz outlet.
4. Verify that the "DC Input" and "Bat. Charger" LEDs are lit.
5. Charge batteries for at least one hour. If the “Bat. Failure” LED is illuminated after the charge,
replace the Programmer’s batteries.

A-6 CHANGE OR SET THE ADDRESS OF A DEVICE


1. Connect the alligator clips of the interface cable to the terminals of an addressable device.
2. After about 17 seconds, the top row of the display should indicate the device address (000 to
255), and shortly after, the bottom row of the display should indicate “000.”
Note: All new addressable devices should have an address of 000.
3. Refer to the Trouble Code Table if the Trouble LED lights, if the Programmer beeps, or if a
trouble code is displayed.
4. To change the address, enter a value between 001 and 255 into the keypad. The entered value
will appear in the bottom row of the display. Press the <ENTER> key.
5. After about 10 seconds, the entered address will be displayed on the top row of the display.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for each device to be addressed.

December 2004 A-2 P/N 06-236529-001


A-7 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
1. Ensure that the power switch is off (down position) and that the power cord is disconnected.
2. Remove the four Phillips-head screws from the back panel of the Programmer.
3. Lift the rear panel from the unit carefully, preventing tension to the wiring connected to the
rear panel PC board. Place rear panel on the side of the unit. Do not disconnect
interconnecting wiring.
4. Remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the battery bracket. Lift out the bracket.
5. Remove battery pack and disconnect battery connector.
6. Insert new battery pack by reversing the steps above.

Table A-2. Supported Devices

Supported Devices Part Number

Ionization Detectors 70-402001-100


70-401001-000
70-401002-000
70-401004-000
Photoelectric Detectors 71-402001-100
71-401001-000
71-401002-000
71-401004-000
Thermistor Heat Detector 70-404001-100
Addressable Contact Input Devices 70-407002-00X
70-407003-001
70-407004-001
70-4070x8-00x
Relay Devices 70-408001-000
70-408003-000
70-4080x4-001
Addressable Signal Module 70-200200-00X

A-8 POWER SPECIFICATIONS ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL MODULE

AC Input Rating: 120Vac, 1.0A (Max.)

DC Output Rating: 12Vdc, 1.75A (Max.)

Battery Rating: 7.2Vdc, 700 mAH

P/N 06-236529-001 A-3 December 2004


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

December 2004 A-4 P/N 06-236529-001


APPENDIX A
ROUTINGS FOR POWER-LIMITED AND
NON-POWER-LIMITED WIRING
This appendix provides guidelines for power-limited and non-power-limited wiring requirements. The
following wiring requirements shall be observed:
• Power-limited and non-power-limited wiring must be physically separated within the control-unit
enclosure
• All power-limited wiring must be separated by at least ¼-inch (6.35 mm) from any non-power-
limited wiring
• Power-limited and non-power-limited wiring cannot enter and exit the control-unit enclosure
through the same knockout or conduit.

Figure A-1 shows typical wiring for power-limited and non-power-limited circuits.

P/N 06-236529-001 A-1 December 2004


TB1 TB15
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

J3 J5 RS-232 A
SLC RS 485
USB B
RS-232 B J8

NO NC C
Relay 1

TB4
System Status

NO NC C
Relay 2

TB8
POWER ON 1 2 3

NO NC C NO NC C
Relay 3
TM ACKNOWLEDGE

TB9
ALARM
SILENCE 4 5 6
PRE-ALARM

Trouble

TB10
TROUBLE RESET 7 8 9

Use left-side gutter for non- Style 4 J10 SUPERVISORY

SILENCE SCROLL 0

power-limited wiring. S2
Use right-side gutter for power-
limited wiring.

1 2 3 4
NAC 2
TB3
- -

TB14
+

1 2 3 4
NAC 1
+
Batt Out

TB5
J12
PSU

1/4-in. (min.)
N
AC IN

240
Release 1 Release 2 Aux 24 VDC Combo 1 Combo 2
L

120 TB11 TB2 TB7 TB6


TB13 TB12 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Non-power-limited wiring Power-limited wiring
1/4-in. (min.)

Maintain 1/4-in. separation as shown between power-


limited and non-power-limited wiring in this area.

A-A

Non-power-limited
wiring
Power-limited wiring

A-A

Note:

Route wiring as shown when combination power-limited and non-power-limited circuits are used.

Direct all non-power-limited wiring to the rear and then to the left-hand side of the enclosure. Tie wrap this wiring to the
back of the enclosure to maintain a minimum 1/4-inch separation from all power-limited wiring.

Direct all power-limited wiring outward and then to the right-hand side of the enclosure. Also tie wrap this wiring as
necessary to maintain a minimum 1/4-inch separation from all non-power-limited wiring.

Figure A-1. Power-Limited and Non-Power-Limited Wiring

December 2004 A-2 P/N 06-236529-001


APPENDIX A
CENTRAL-STATION OPERATION

The FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit can be programmed for central-station operation through the
application-specific configuration software. Refer to the FENWALNET 6000 Programmer's Guide to set
up a control unit for central-station operation.

Use a UL Listed and compatible digital alarm communicator/transmitter (DACT) to transmit the alarm,
supervisory, and trouble signals off-premises to the central station. The typical interconnections
between the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit and the DACT are shown in Figure A-1.

Refer to the DACT installation manual to interface the DACT to the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit
and to connect this equipment to the public switched telephone network for off-premises signal
transmissions.

DACT Trouble-Initiating Circuit

DACT Supervisory-Initiating Circuit

DACT Alarm-Initiating Circuit


NO NC C

End-of-Line Relay 1
Resistor (Programmed for General Alarm)
NO NC C

End-of-Line Relay 2
Resistor (Programmed for Supervisory Service)
NO NC C

Relay 3
NO NC C

End-of-Line Relay 4
Resistor (Trouble)

FENWALNET 6000 Relays


Note:
Model AO Addressable Relays may be substituted for
control-unit relays.
Figure A-1. Typical FENWALNET 6000 and DACT Interconnections

P/N 06-236529-001 A-1 December 2004


Figure A-2 shows the interconnection between the FENWALNET 6000 Control Unit and the Silent
Knight Model 5104 DACT as a specific example.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112
NO NC C

Relay 1
4.7k
(Programmed for General Alarm)
NO NC C

Relay 2
4.7k
(Programmed for Supervisory Service)
NO NC C

Relay 3
NO NC C

4.7k Trouble

FENWALNET 6000 Relays Silent Knight 5104 DACT


Initiating Device Circuits

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.


Note:

Model AO Addressable Relays may be substituted for


control-unit relays.
Figure A-2. FENWALNET 6000 and Silent Knight Model 5104 DACT Interconnections

December 2004 A-2 P/N 06-236529-001


APPENDIX A
FACTORY MUTUAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PRE-ACTION
AND DELUGE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
FENWALNET 6000 system applications that require Factory Mutual (FM) Approval of pre-action and
deluge sprinkler systems must conform to the following guidelines:
• SmartOne® Thermal Detectors, Model THD-7252, must be installed at 20 ft. spacings. The pre-
alarm and alarm setpoint ranges are as follows:
– Pre-Alarm: 80° to 155° F
– Alarm: 135° to 155° F
• The signaling line circuit must be configured for Style 6 wiring. Refer to Figure 2-14.
• Provide 90 hours of standby battery and 10 minutes of alarm operation. Refer to Appendix A.
• Each release circuit is required to be configured for solenoid activation. The solenoid output on-
time period should be set to either “90 seconds” or “on until reset”.

P/N 06-236529-001 A-1 December 2004


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

December 2004 A-2 P/N 06-236529-001


TECHNICAL MANUAL USER FEEDBACK FORM

(Use this report to indicate deficiencies, user remarks and recommendations relating to the publication. Fold on dotted line, tape and mail to
KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc., 400 Main Street, Ashland, MA 01721, Attn. Documentation Manager or FAX to 508-881-8920)

DATE:

1. PART NUMBER 2. VOLUME NO. 3. TITLE (NOMENCLATURE)

4. CHANGE NO. OR REV. DATE 5. SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT 6. PRIORITY OF COMMENT

7. USER EVALUATION

MANUAL IS: ‰ EXCELLENT ‰ GOOD ‰ FAIR ‰ POOR ‰ COMPLETE ‰ INCOMPLETE

8. ‰ PROBLEM ‰ QUESTION ‰ SUGGESTION ‰ COMMENT: (check one)

9. RECOMMENDED CHANGE TO PUBLICATION

PAGE PARAGRAPH LINE FIGURE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON


NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. (Use Blank Continuation Sheets as Required)

10. ORIGINATOR 11. COMPANY NAME

12. ADDRESS

13. KIDDE-FENWAL USE ONLY


a. Received b. Action Necessity c. Priority d. Comments

220423
FOLD

Place
Stamp
Here

KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc.
400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721

FOLD

220423
Fenwal, FENWALNET 6000, SmartOne are registered trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
TM

These instructions do not purport to cover all the details or variations in the equipment described,
R

nor do they provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation
and maintenance. All specifications subject to change without notice. Should further information be
Protection Systems desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. purposes, the matter should be referred to KIDDE-FENWAL INC., Ashland, Masssachusetts
400 MAIN STREET, ASHLAND, MA 01721
TEL: (508)881-2000 FAX: (508) 881-8920
www.fenwalfire.com P/N 06-236529-001 Rev. AA ©2004 Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Printed in USA

You might also like